Home

Agilent Technologies 33220A User's Manual

1. e i p 1 pneis e e p ered i 08 wn ate on sire ots si Mine A sAd ya wed a jat Ne mn os ai n tat P at i Andy ST yi Perio Aw f E User s Guide Egay PAESI G ae gt eo PIPERO TANO t poy 7 EENET TR ry ei re we Penner fei hess Oporto ye see Me gece ote Py Se 5 X Front Panel Menu Operation Features and Functions Remote Interface Reference Errors Messages Application Programs Tutorial Specifications IVG PERG PUVVGETUEE SLALG WHJ VE UH power down recall mode See Instrurr mB It BU EAA AAAA AAAA AAAA LA VY Output Configuration Function Frequency Amplitude Offset Output Units _ Output Termination Autorange Modulation Carrier AM FM PM FSK Carrier PWM Mod Waveform AM Mod Waveform FM PM PWM AM Depth FM Deviation PM Deviation FSK Hop Frequency FSK Rate PWM Width Deviation Modulation State Sweep Start Stop Frequency Sweep Time Sweep Mode Sweep State Burst Burst Count Burst Period Burst Start Phase Burst State System Related Operations e Power Down Recall Display Mode Error Queue Stored States Stored Arbs Output State Triggering Operations Trigger Source Remote interface Configuration GPIB Address DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask
2. Chapter 7 Tutorial Burst N Cycle Burst An N Cycle burst consists of a specific number of waveform cycles 1 to 50 000 and is always initiated by a trigger event You can also set the burst count to Infinite which results in a continuous waveform once the function generator is triggered syne Output ee ofon d Sdebeaefebeastebeppebetepe deaetea deep papper eeprrrepierej pebe paras h fe ete ne othe eee ee ee ee r paean fe abe bo gr CES oppi 3 i Main Output pupe pbt Three Cycle Burst Waveform For bursts the trigger source can be an external signal an internal timer the key or a command received from the remote interface The input for external trigger signals is the rear panel Trig In connector This connector accepts TTL compatible levels and is referenced to chassis ground not floating ground When not used as an input the Trig In connector can be configured as an output to enable the 33220A to trigger other instruments at the same time as its internal trigger occurs An N Cycle burst always begins and ends at the same point in the wavetorm called the start phase A starting phase of 0 corresponds to the beginning of the waveform record and 360 corresponds to the end of the waveform record Gated Burst In the Gated burst mode the output waveform is either on or off based on t
3. NRAM TRI NOIS or USER Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle r Ld e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry a Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform Ps with 0 symmetry Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 194 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands FM INTernal FREQuency lt requency gt MINimum MAXimum FM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected FM SOUR INT command ia Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz X MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in hertz FM DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum FM DEViation MINimum MAXimum Set the peak frequency deviation in hertz This value represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency Select any value from 1 uHz to 10 05 MHz limited to 150 kHz for ramps and 3 05 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz MIN 1 wHz MAX based on the frequency of the carrier waveform as shown below The DEV query returns the
4. Front Panel Operation Press and select the Output Setup softkey Then press the Range softkey again to toggle between the Auto and Hold selections Remote Interface Operation VOLTage RANGe AUTO OFF ON ONCE The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging Output Control You can disable or enable the front panel Output connector By default the output is disabled at power on to protect other equipment When enabled the key is illuminated Ifan excessive external voltage is applied to the front panel Output connector an error message will be displayed and the output will be disabled To re enable the output remove the overload from the Output connector and press to enable the output e Front Panel Operation Press to enable or disable the output 66 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Remote Interface Operation OUTPut OFF ON The APPLy command overrides the current setting and automatically enables the Output connector Waveform Polarity In the normal mode default the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle In the inverted mode the waveform goes negative during the first part of the cycle e As shown in the examples below the waveform is inverted relative to the offset voltage Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged when the waveform is inverted Normal Inverted Normal Invert
5. and then sets the frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform Private Sub cmdSimpleSine Click Dim io_mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set Fgen IO io _mgr Open txtI0 Text On Error GoTo MyError This program sets up a waveform by selecting the waveshape and adjusting the frequency amplitude and offset With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers WriteString FUNCtion SINusoid Select waveshape Other options are SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC and USER WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Set the load impedance in Ohms 50 Ohms default May also be INFinity as when using oscilloscope or DMM WriteString FREQuency 2500 Set the frequency WriteString VOLTage 1 2 Set the amplitude in Vpp Also see VOLTage UNIT WriteString VOLTage OFFSet 0 4 Set the offset in Volts Voltage may also be set as VOLTage HIGH and VOLTage LOW for low level and high level WriteString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 304 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Amplitude Modulation This program found in the Examples chapter6 AMLowLevel subdirectory on the CD ROM configur
6. i1 ms intervals Pulse width is 100 us Edge time is 20 ns rise time fail time Turn on the instrument output had WriteString OUTPut ON For I 0 To 18 Vary edge by 10 nsec steps WriteString PULSe TRANsition amp 0 00000002 I 0 00000001 Sleep 300 Wait 300 msec Next I End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Erxrr Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 307 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Pulse Width Modulation PWM This program found in the Examples chapter6 PulseWidthMod subdirectory on the CD ROM configures a pulse waveform with duty cycle which is then slowly modulated by a triangle waveform Private Sub cmdPWM Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set Fgen iIO io mgr Open txtIoO Text On Error GoTo MyError This program uses low level SCPI commands to configure the function gnerator to output an PWM waveform The pulse is set up with a duty cycle of 35 and a depth of 15 and will vary in width from 20 to 50 with the modulation The pulse may also be configured in time units pulse width and deviation rather than duty cycle if preferred With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 0 0 Lear Clear errors amp status registers WriteString O
7. 192 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands Frequency Modulation FM Commands See also Frequency Modulation starting on page 79 in chapter 3 FM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an FM waveform The commands used for FM are listed on the next page 1 Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and de are not allowed 2 Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the FM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 below 3 Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and de are not allowed Use the FM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape 4 Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the FM INT FREQ command 5 Set the peak frequency deviation Set the frequency deviation to any value from 1 uHz to 10 05 MHz limited to 150 kHz for ramps and 3 05 MHz for arbitrary waveforms vs using the FM DEV command 6 Enable FM mo
8. External Frequency Reference Option 001 Rear Panel Input Lock Range Level Impedance Lock Time Rear Panel Output Frequency Level Impedance 10 MHz 500 Hz 100 mVpp to 5 Vpp 1 kQ typical AC coupled lt 2 seconds 10 MHz 632 mVpp 0 dBm typical 50 Q typical AC coupled Phase Offset Range Resolution Accuracy Modulation AM Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Depth FM Carrier Waveforms Source internal Modulation Deviation PM Carrier Waveforms Source internal Modulation Deviation PWM Carrier Waveforms Source internal Modulation Deviation 360 to 360 degrees 0 001 degrees 20 ns Sine Square Ramp Arb internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mHz to 20 kHz 0 0 to 120 0 Sine Square Ramp Arb Internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mHz to 20 kHz DC to 10 MHz Sine Square Ramp Arb internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mhz to 20 kHz 0 0 to 360 0 degrees Pulse Internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 MHz to 20 kHz 0 to 100 of pulse width 337 FSK Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Sine Square Ramp Arb internai External 50 duty cycle square 2 MHz to
9. errors 287 settings conflict errors 278 arbitrary waveform errors 299 348 Index calibration errors 298 execution errors 278 instrument errors 295 query errors 294 self test errors 296 remote interface command reference 147 command summary 149 configuration 135 remote trigger 225 remove arb waveforms 236 remove stored state 240 reset 35 245 resistance load 35 323 revision firmware 134 RMS voltage 325 root mean square 325 rubber bumpers removing 29 S SCPI command terminators 269 language overview 266 parameter types 270 SCPI command reference 147 SCPI command summary 149 SCPI status system 250 SCPI version 134 245 screen 4 displaying message 132 244 number format 133 sereen blank 130 screen contrast 131 screen enable disable 132 243 screen saver mode 130 security calibration 141 self test 131 self test 245 error messages 296 serial poll 254 service request SRQ 254 settings default 145 shipping contents 15 shock hazard 6 signal imperfections 320 sin x x waveform 228 sinc waveform 228 sinewave spectral purity 336 slope trigger trigger input 214 trigger output 214 slope trigger 214 222 225 burst 113 sweep 104 softkey labeis 4 software bus trigger 117 213 221 224 software revision 134 software connectivity 15 sound beeper 130 specifications 335 spurs 321 square wave duty cycle 180 duty cycle selection 23 square waveform duty cycle 64 square waveforms tutorial
10. starting on page 115 in chapter 3 TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIGger SOURcCe Select the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger The function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Trig In connector or a software bus trigger The default is IMM The SOUR query returns IMM EXT or BUS When the Immediate internal source is selected the function generator outputs continuously when the sweep mode or burst mode is enabled e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG SLOP command see page 225 e When the Bus software source is selected the function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received To trigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN when the Bus source selected send the TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger e The APPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to TRIG SOUR IMM command aad Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Triggering Commands To ensure synchr
11. 1 ON CALibration SETup lt 0 1 2 3 94 gt CALibration SETup Configure the function generator s internal state for each of the calibration steps to be performed The SET query reads the calibration setup number and returns a value from 0 to 94 CALibration VALue lt value gt CALibration VALue Specify the value of the known calibration signal as outlined in the calibration procedures in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Use the CAL SET command to configure the function generator s internal state for each of the calibration steps to be performed The VAL query returns a number in the form 1 0000000000000E 01 CALibration Perform a calibration of the instrument using the specified calibration value CAL VAL command Before you can calibrate the function generator you must unsecure it by entering the correct security code Returns 0 PASS or 1 FAIL 264 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Calibration Commands CALibration SECure CODE lt new code gt Enter a new security code To change the security code you must first unsecure the function generator using the old security code and then enter a new code The security code is stored in non volatile memory e The calibration code may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ You do not
12. 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FSK and AM at the same time When you enable FSK the previous modulation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow FSK to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FSK the sweep or burst mode is turned off 202 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands See also Pulse Width Modulation in chapter 3 PWM Overview an 7 The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a PWM waveform The PWM commands are listed on the next page 1 Configure the carrier pulse waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the pulse waveform PWM is supported only for pulse 2 Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the PWM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 below 3 Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and de are not allowed Use the PWM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape 4 Set the modulating frequency Set
13. Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set a DC Offset Voltage To Set a DC Offset Voltage At power on the function generator outputs a sine wave with a de offset of 0 volts Gnto a 50Q termination The following steps show you how to change the offset to 1 5 mVde Press the Offset softkey The displayed offset voltage is either the power on value or the offset previously selected When you change functions the same offset is used if the present value is valid for the new function 9 000 Vi V Period Hilevel Loleve Enter the magnitude of the desired offset Using the numeric keypad enter the value 1 5 Select the desired units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the function generator outputs the waveform with the displayed offset Gf the output is enabled For this example press MVpc 4 Period HiLevel Note You can also enter the desired value using the knob and cursor keys 20 rrr a Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the High Level and Low Level Values To Set the High Level and Low Level Values You can specify a signal by setting its amplitude and de offset values as described previously Another way to set the limits of a signal is to specify its high level maximum and low level minimum values This is typically convenient for digital applications In the following example let s set the high level to 1 0 V and the low level t
14. Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry MINimum MAXimum Set the symmetry percentage for ramp waves Symmetry represents the amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted You can set the symmetry to any value from 0 to 100 The default is 100 MIN 0 MAX 100 The SYMM query returns the current symmetry setting in percent 0 Symmetry 100 Symmetry e For ramp waveforms the APPLy command overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 The symmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp wave to another function When you return to the ramp wave function the previous symmetry is used e Ifyou select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM or FM the symmetry setting does not apply OUTPut OFF ON OUTPut Disable or enable the front panel Output connector The default is OFF When the output is enabled the key is illuminated on the function generator s front panel The OUTP query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The APPLy command overrides the current OUTP command setting and automatically enables the Output connector ON If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front panel Output connector an error message will be displayed and the output will be disabled T
15. DNS Server LAN DNS Domain Name Service is an Internet service that translates Domain names into IP addresses The DNS server address is the IP address of a server that performs this service Contact your network administrator to find out whether DNS is being used and for the correct DNS server address Enter the address using the numeric keypad not the knob e The DNS server address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front panel operation Press and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select DNS Server There is no SCPI command to set a DNS server address 139 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Current Configuration LAN Select the Currently Active Settings display to view the current LAN configuration information Front panel operation Press and press the VO softkey Select LAN and then select Current Config There is no SCPI command to display the configuration screen Note This display reflects only the settings that are currently active If you have changed any LAN settings you must first cycle the power to activate the settings then select Current Config Also this display is static It does not update information for events that have occurred after the information is displayed For example if DHCP assigns an IP address while the display is open you
16. Default Gateway DNS Server Host Name Domain Name Calibration Calibration State t 8 p Parameters marked with a bullet ar Alata Tha varnistar AK minim vil AA Atta Contents Manuf i Manuf a Agilent 33220A at a Glance 2 z o The Front Panel at a Glance 3 E te The Front Panel Display ata Glance 4 a Front Panel Number Entry 5 4 Confo The Rear Panel ata Glance 6 plas In This Book 7 Eare Chapter 1 Quick Start 13 EMC Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation 31 Chapter 3 Features and Functions 53 B m Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference 147 Chapter 5 Error Messages 273 a Chapter 6 Application Programs 301 Chapter 7 Tutorial 311 Chapter 8 Specifications 335 Index 341 Safety ides 21 Fel Date User s Guide Publication Number 33220 90001 order as 33220 90000 manual set Edition 1 February 2003 Copyright 2003 Agilent Technologies Inc Agilent 33220A 20 MHz Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Agilent 33220A at a Glance The Agilent Technologies 33220A is a 20 MHz synthesized function generator with built in arbitrary waveform and pulse capabilities Its combination of bench top and system features makes this function generator a versatile solution for your testing requirements now and in the future Convenient bench top features e 10 standard waveforms Built in 14 bit 50 MSa s arbitrary waveform capability Precise puls
17. Jitter Noise Bandwidth 3dB Arbitrary Frequency Range Waveform Length Amplitude Resolution Sample Rate Minimum Rise Fall Time Linearity Settiing Time Jitter RMS Non volatiie Memory 1 PHz to 20 MHz lt 13ns lt 2 20 80 to 10 MHz 40 60 to 20 MHz 1 of period 5 ns 300 ps 100 ppm of period t Hz to 200 kHz lt 0 1 of peak output 0 0 to 100 0 500 Hz to 5 MHz 20 ns minimum 10 ns resolution lt 13 ns to 100 ns lt 2 300 ps 0 1 ppm of period 9 MHz typical 1 Hz to 6 MHz 2 to 64 K points 14 bits including sign 50 MSa s 35 ns typical lt 0 1 of peak output lt 250 ns to 0 5 of final value 6ns 30 ppm Four waveforms Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Common Characteristics Amplitude nange nto 50 Q into open circuit Accuracy at 1 kHz E 21 Units Resolution DC Offset Range peak AC DC Accuracy Hb 2 Resolution Main Output Impedance isolation Protection 10 mVpp to 10 Vpp 20 mVpp to 20 Vpp 1 of setting 1mVpp Vpp Vrms dBm 4 digits 5 V into 50 Q 10 V into open circuit 2 of offset setting 0 5 of ampl 2 mV 4 digits 50 Q typical 42 Vpk maximum to earth Short circuit protected overload automaticaly disables main output internal Frequency Reference Accuracy I 10 ppm in 90 days 20 ppm in 1 year
18. Operating Humidity Operating Altitude storage Temperature State Storage Memory interface Language Dimensions W x H x D Bench Top Rack Mount Weight Safety Designed to EMC Tested to Vibration and Shock Acoustic Noise Warm up Time Warranty Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator CAT il 100 to 240 Ve 50 60 Hz 5 10 100 to 120 V 400 Hz 10 50 VA maximum IEC 61010 Pollution Degree 2 indoor Location 0 C to 55 C 5 to 80 RH non condensing Up to 3000 meters 30 C to 70 C Power off state automatically saved Four user configurable stored states GPIB USB and LAN standard SCPI 1993 IEEE 488 2 261 1 mm by 103 8 mm by 303 2 mm 212 8 mm by 88 3 mm by 272 3 mm 3 4 kg 7 5 ibs UL 1244 CSA 1010 EN61010 MIL 461C EN55014 EN50082 1 MIL T 28800 Type Hi Class 5 30 dBa 1 hour 3 years standard Note Specifications are subject to change without notice For the latest specifications go to the Agilent 33220A product page and find the Product Datasheet www agilent com find 33220A This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme aia norme NMB 007 du Canada Footnotes T Add 1 10th of output amplitude and offset specification per C for operation outside the range of 18 C to 28 C 2 Autorange enabled 3 DC offset set to 0 V 4 Spurious d
19. Settings conflict turned off infinite burst to allow immediate trigger source An infinite count burst is allowed only when the external or bus software trigger source is selected The burst count has been set to the maximum N Cycle value 50 000 cycles Settings conflict infinite burst changed trigger source to BUS An infinite count burst is allowed only when the external or bus software trigger source is selected Sending the BURS NCYC INF command has automatically changed the trigger source from immediate to bus Settings conflict burst period increased to fit entire burst The number of cycles specified by the BURS NCYC command takes priority over the burst period as long as the burst period is not at its maximum value The function generator has increased the burst period to accommodate the specified burst count or waveform frequency Settings conflict burst count reduced to fit entire burst Since the burst period is currently at its maximum the function generator has reduced the burst count to allow the specified waveform frequency PAs 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict triggered burst not available for noise You cannot use the noise function in the triggered burst mode Noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode Settings conflict amplitude units changed to Vpp due to high Z load The output units VOLT UNIT command cann
20. assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted The default is 50 MIN selects the minimum duty cycle for the selected frequency and MAX selects the maximum duty cycle see restrictions below The DCYC query returns the current duty cycle setting in percent 20 Duty Cycle 80 Duty Cycie Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz e For square waveforms the APPLy command overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square wave to another function When you return to the square wave function the previous duty cycle is used e Limits Due to Frequency If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described Ifyou select a square waveform as the modulating waveform for AM or FM the duty cycle setting does not apply The function generator always uses a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle 180 seveegesennsnneenneenneg
21. indicating full amplitude available e The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sine waveform does not use the full range of binary values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e Ifyou query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated 237 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference State Storage Commands State Storage Commands The function generator has five storage locations in non volatile memory to store instrument states The locations are numbered 0 through 4 The function generator automatically uses location OQ to hold the state of the instrument at power down You can also assign a user defined name to each of the locations 1 through 4 for use from the front panel sav 0 1 2 3 4 Store save the current instrument state in the specified non volatile storage location Any state previously stored in the same location will be overwritten and no error will be generated You can store the instrument state in any of the five storage locations However you can only recall a state from a location that contains a previously stored state From the remote interface only you can use storage location 0 to store a fifth instrument state you cannot store to this location from th
22. step like waveform For this example turn on linear interpolation 6 Set the initial number of waveform points You can create an arbitrary waveform with up to 65 536 64K points The waveform editor initially builds a waveform with two points and automatically connects the last point of the waveform to the voltage level of the first point to create a continuous waveform Press the Init Points softkey to specify the initial number of waveform points you can add or remove points later if necessary For this example set the initial number of points to 4 7 Start the point by point editing process Press the Edit Points softkey to accept the initial waveform settings and begin point by point editing The status line at the top of the display window shows the point number at the eft the time value of the current point in the center and the voltage value of the current point to the right 8 Define the first waveform point Press the Voltage softkey to set the voltage level for Point 1 this point is fixed at a time of 0 seconds By default Point 1 is set equal to the upper limit For this example set the voltage level of Point 1 to 0 V y OR OI B D Y 000 v mw Insert Enid Voltage Point Store Point 122 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms 9 Define the next waveform point Press the Point softkey and then turn the knob to move to Point 2 Press the Time
23. 580 Chapter 5 Error Messages Instrument Errors So M Instrument Errors 501 Cross isolation UART framing error 502 Cross isolation UART overrun error These errors indicate an internal hardware failure The isolation between chassis ground circuits and floating circuits is controlled by an optical isolation barrier and a serial link Reference phase locked loop is unlocked The PHAS UNL ERR STAT has been enabled on and the internal phase locked loop that controls the frequency is currently unlocked This error is most likely to occur when the external reference is out of lock range 290 601 603 604 605 606 619 to 621 623 to 625 622 Chapter 5 Error Messages Self Test Errors Self Test Errors The following errors indicate failures that may occur during a self test Refer to the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information Self test failed system logic This error indicates a failure of the main processor U101 system RAM U102 or system ROM U103 Self test failed waveform logic This error indicates that the waveform logic in the synthesis IC U50 1 has failed Self test failed waveform memory bank This error indicates that either the waveform RAM U502 or the synthesis IC U501 has failed Self test failed modulation memory bank This error indicates that the modulation memory bank in the synthesis C U501 has faile Self test failed Cross isolation interf
24. BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted BURSt GATE POLarity Select whether the function generator uses true high or true low logic levels on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally gated burst The default is NORM true high logic The POL query returns NORM or INV 225 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Triggering Commands OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe Select a rising or falling edge for the trigger out signal When enabled using the OUTP TRIG command see below a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst Select POS to output a pulse with a rising edge or select NEG to output a pulse with a falling edge The default is POS The SLOP query returns POS or NEG gt When the Immediate internal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector The period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time SWE TIME command or burst period BURS INT PER command plus 1 ms e When the External trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally trigg
25. Burst Phase The burst phase defines the starting phase of the burst e Burst phase 360 degrees to 360 degrees The default is O degrees e From the remote interface you can set the starting phase in degrees or radians using the UNIT ANGL command see page 221 From the front panel the starting phase is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the starting phase in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the function generator converts the phase to degrees For sine square and ramp waveforms 0 degrees is the point at which the waveform crosses zero volts or the dc offset value in a positive going direction For arbitrary waveforms 0 degrees is the first waveform point downloaded to memory The burst phase has no effect on pulse or noise waveforms The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops The output will remain at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase e Front Panel Operation To set the burst phase press the Start Phase softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired phase in degrees Remote Interface Operation BURSt PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum 112 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Trigger Source In the triggered burst mode th
26. CARDIAC VOLATILE or the name of any user defined waveforms in non volatile memory The default selection is EXP_ RISE Note that this command does not output the selected arbitrary waveform Use the FUNC USER command see the following page to output the selected waveform e The names of the five built in arbitrary waveforms are EXP RISE EXP_FALL NEG RAMP SINC and CARDIAC To select the waveform currently stored in volatile memory specify the VOLATILE parameter The keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form Ifyou select a waveform name that is not currently downloaded a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated 233 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands The function generator does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB 1 and arb 1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case e Use the DATA CAT command to list the names of the five built in waveforms non volatile VOLATILE if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory and the names of any user defined waveforms non volatile FUNCtion USER FUNCtion Select the arbitrary waveform function and output the current arbitrary waveform When executed this command outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC USER command see the previous page The selected waveform is
27. DEFault 149 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Output Configuration Commands see page 172 for more information FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER FUNCtion FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum VOLTage lt amplitude gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage MINimum MAXimum VOLTage OFFSet lt offset gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage OFFSet MINimum MAXimum VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum HIGH MINimum MAXimum LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum LOW MINimum MAXimum VOLTage RANGe AUTO OFF ON ONCE VOLTage RANGe AUTO VOLTage UNIT VPP VRMS DBM VOLTage UNIT FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry MINimum MAXimum OuUTPut OFF ON OUTPut OUTPut LOAD lt ohms gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum OUTPut LOAD MINimum MAXimum OUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted OUTPut POLarity OUTPut SYNC OFF ON OUTPut SYNC Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 150 dad duwbiles A Aaea enio Patentu tees otek ote 205s x EEE CATA AEAT ES I sincinesneteee ees patie Pap AEE Sos toe SEL LE LEE SEES SS EEE ESE EES SED EDIE LIE 3 R NAE EEE BEER Sa 2 barteri X ALRITE mise pier Sin sf raptors ete
28. Depending on the number of characters you specify in the string the function generator will choose one of two font sizes to display the message You can display approximately 12 characters in a large font and approximately 40 characters in a small font An example is shown below DISP TEXT Test in Progress e While a message is displayed information relating to the output waveform such as frequency and amplitude is not sent to the front panel display DISPlay TEXT CLEar Clear the text message currently shown on the function generator s front panel display e Ifthe display is currently enabled DISP ON command the DISP TEXT CLEAR command will return the normal front panel display mode Ifthe display is currently disabled DISP OFF command the DISP TEXT CLEAR command will clear the message but the display will remain disabled To enable the display send the DISP ON command press the key or send the GTL Go To Local command for GPIB or USB For LAN you can send the SYST COMM RLST LOC command 244 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Reiated Commands RST Reset the function generator to its factory default state see Agilent 33220A Factory Default Settings in chapter 3 independent of the MEM STAT REC AUTO command setting This command will abort a sweep or burst in progress and will re enable the front panel display if it was previously disabled DISP OFF command TST
29. Self Test Passed is displayed on the front panel If the self test fails Self Test Failed is displayed and an error number is shown See the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for instructions on returning the instrument to Agilent for service o i Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Self Test softkey from the Test Cal menu Remote Interface Operation Sone Returns 0 if the self test passes or 1 if it fails If the self test fails an error message is also generated with additional information on why the test failed 131 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Display Control For security reasons or to speed up the rate at which the function generator can execute commands from the remote interface you may want to turn off the front panel display From the remote interface you can also display a 12 character message on the front panel e You can only disable the front panel display by sending a command from the remote interface you cannot disable the front panel while in local operation When disabled the front panel display is blanked however the bulb used to backlight the display remains enabled All keys except are locked out when the display is disabled e Sending a message to the front panel display from the remote interface overrides the display state This means that you can display a message even if the display is currently disabled remote in
30. Turn on the instrument output WriteString SWEep STATe ON Turn sweep on End With Exit Sub MyEYror txthrror Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 306 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example A Pulse Waveform This program found in the Examples chapter6 Pulse subdirectory on the CD ROM configures a pulse waveform setting pulse width period and high low levels The edge time is then incremented Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib kernel32 ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long Private Sub cmdPulse Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0438 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set Fgen IO io mgr Open txtiIo Text Dim I As Integer On Error GoTo MykError This program sets up a pulse waveshape and adjusts the edge time It also shows the use of high and low voltage levels 7 and period The edge time is adjusted by 10 nsec increments With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors amp status registers WriteString FUNCtion PULSe Select pulse waveshape WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Set load impedance to 50 Ohms default Low level 0 V High level 75 V WriteString VOLTage LOW 0 WriteString VOLTage HIGH 0 75 WriteString PULSe PERiod ie 3 WriteString PULSe WIDTh 100e 6 WriteString PULSe TRANsition 20e 9
31. sweeps Sync signal 100 101 symmetry 65 definition 65 symmetry definition 181 Syne connector 215 Sync signal enable disable 69 syne signal 333 for all waveform functions 68 Syne connector 68 syntax SCPI commands 149 SYSTem BEE Per STATe command 245 BEEPer command 245 246 COMMunicate RLSTate command 247 ERRor command 242 VERSion command 245 system error 129 242 T technical support 7 temperature overload 30 terminal 10 MHz In 248 10 MHz Out 248 Modulation In 78 84 92 98 Output 181 Sync Output 68 Sync output 215 Trig In 118 Trig Out 119 214 223 226 termination 35 63 termination load 323 terminators command 269 test 131 245 text message calibration 144 265 time sweep 212 tone enable disable 245 246 transition time pulse 189 translated language heip system 28 Trig In connector 118 Trig Out connector 119 214 223 226 TRIGger SLOPe command 214 222 225 SOURce command 213 221 224 trigger burst 113 bus software 221 224 external 213 221 224 immediate internal 213 221 224 software bus 213 sweep 104 trigger out signal burst 114 trigger out signal sweep 5 TRiGger command 225 trigger output signal 214 223 226 trigger slope 214 222 225 burst 113 sweep 104 trigger input 214 trigger output 214 trigger source 213 triggering burst 114 external source 117 front panel operation 46 internal source 116 manual source 116 software bus source 117 sweep 105 Tri
32. 0 625 X Pulse Width Settings conflict edge time decreased due to pulse duty cycle For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the edge time to accommodate the specified pulse duty cycle Edge Time lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 Settings conflict amplitude changed due to function In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units currently selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms upper limit for sine waves in Vrms Settings conflict offset changed on exit from dc function In the de voltage function the voltage level is controlled by adjusting the offset voltage the current amplitude is ignored When you select a different function the function generator will adjust the offset voltage as needed to be compatible with the current amplitude setting 284 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messa ges Execution Errors Settings confliet FM deviation cannot exceed carrier
33. 20 us using the numeric a or the knob and cursor keys A 2 Ous Wl 2 ti 40 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a PWM Waveform 4 Set the modulating frequency Press the PWM Freq softkey and then set the value to 5 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys PWM bey wine 5 000 Hz Ti EE Sh iE er El a Source Width Ext Dev 5 Select the modulating waveform shape Press the Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform For this example select a sine wave At this point the function generator outputs a PWM waveform with the specified modulation parameters if the output is enabled 6 View the waveform Press to view the waveform and parameters a Pain 2 HUES Source Width intixt Dev To turn off the Graph Mode press again Of course to really view the PWM waveform you would need to output it to an oscilloscope If you do this you will see how the pulse width varies in this case from 80 to 120 us At a modulation frequency of 5 Hz the deviation is quite visible 41 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Frequency Sweep To Output a Frequency Sweep In the frequency sweep mode the function generator steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in frequency and with either linear or logarithmic spacing For this example you will output a swept s
34. AM Front Panel Menu Operation Front Panel Menu Operation This chapter introduces you to the front panel keys and menu operation This chapter does not give a detailed description of every front panel key or menu operation It does however give you an overview of the front panel menus and many front panel operations See chapter 3 Features and Functions starting on page 53 for a complete discussion of the function generator s capabilities and operation e Front Panel Menu Reference on page 33 To Select the Output Termination on page 35 To Reset the Function Generator on page 35 To Output a Modulated Waveform on page 36 To Output an FSK Waveform on page 38 e To Output a PWM Waveform on page 40 e To Output a Frequency Sweep on page 42 To Output a Burst Waveform on page 44 To Trigger a Sweep or Burst on page 46 e To Store the Instrument State on page 47 To Configure the Remote Interface on page 48 32 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation Front Paneil Menu Reference Front Panel Menu Reference This section gives an overview of the front panel menus The remainder of this chapter contains examples of using the front panel menus Configure the modulation parameters for AM FM PM FSK and PWM Select the modulation type e Select an internal or external modulation source Specify AM modulation depth modulating frequency and modulation shape Specify FM frequency devia
35. CENELEC EN 45014 z Agilent Technologies o s T Ts Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Incorporated Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street SW Loveland Colorado 80537 USA Declares that the product Product Name 20 MHz Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Viodel Number 33220A Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product s Conforms with the following European Directives The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC including 93 68 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly Conforms with the following product standards EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2000 EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 1 CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1998 EN 61000 4 2 1995 AKV CD 8kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1995 3 Vim 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5kV signal lines kY power lines IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1995 0 5 kV line line 1 kV line ground IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 3V 0 15 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 14 1994 Dips 30 10ms 60 700ms interrupt gt 95 5000ms Canada ICES 001 1998 2 Australia New Zealand AS NZS 2064 1 1 This product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems 7 This ISM device complies with Canadian CES 001 1998 Cet appare
36. Duty Cycle 100 1 6 X Edge Time 185 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands This command affects the period and frequency for all waveform functions not just pulse For example if you select a period using the PULS PER command and then change the function to sine wave the specified period will be used for the new function Function Limitations If you change to a function whose minimum period is greater than that for a pulse waveform the period is adjusted to the minimum value allowed for the new function For example if you output a pulse waveform with a period of 200 ns and then change to the ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the period to 5 us the lower limit for ramps From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the period will be adjusted as described FUNCtion PULSe HOLD WIDTh DCyCle FUNCtion PULSe HOLD WIDTh DCYCle Set the function generator to hold either pulse width or pulse duty cycle e WIDTh The function generator holds the pulse width setting in seconds constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a duty cycle value is received the duty cycle is converted to the equivalent pulse width in seconds If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse width is held and the width deviation also is held as the period is varied Duty cycle
37. Fhe carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the frequency deviation If you set the carrier to a value less than the deviation frequency with FM enabled the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Settings conflict FM deviation exceeds max frequency _ The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 5 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you set the carrier to a value that is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Settings conflict PWM deviation decreased due to pulse parameters The PWM deviation is limited by the pulse width or duty cycle edge time and period The PWM deviation width or duty cycle deviation is adjusted to fit within these limits See Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands in chapter 4 for further information Settings conflict frequency forced duty cycle change If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 15 MHz
38. HOLD command The edge time setting FUNC PULS TRAN command is also preserved However based on the specified frequency the function generator will adjust the pulse width or edge time to comply with the frequency restrictions for pulse waveforms See page 185 for more information on setting the pulse width and edge time 169 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy NOISe lt frequency DEFault gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output Gaussian noise with the specified amplitude and de offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed The frequency parameter has no effect for this command but you must specify a value or DEFault the noise function has a 10 MHz bandwidth If you specify a frequency it has no effect on the noise output but the value is remembered when you change to a different function The following statement shows the use of the APPLy command for noise APPL NOIS DEF 5 0 2 0 APPLy DC lt frequency DEFault gt lt amplitude gt DEFault gt lt offset gt Output a de voltage with the level specified by the offset parameter You can set the de voltage to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit The de voltage is output as soon as the command is executed e The frequency and amplitude parameters have no effect for this command but you must specify a value or DEFault If you specify a frequency and amp
39. Introduction to the SCPI Language 266 Using Device Clear 271 10 Contents Chapter 5 Error Messages 273 Command Errors 275 Execution Errors 278 Device Dependent Errors 293 Query Errors 294 Instrument Errors 295 Self Test Errors 296 Calibration Errors 298 Arbitrary Waveform Errors 299 Chapter 6 Application Programs 301 Introduction 302 Program Listings 304 Chapter 7 Tutorial 311 Direct Digital Synthesis 313 Creating Arbitrary Waveforms 316 Square Waveform Generation 318 Pulse Waveform Generation 319 Signal Imperfections 320 Output Amplitude Control 322 Ground Loops 323 Attributes of AC Signals 325 Modulation 327 Frequency Sweep 332 Burst 333 O on pap Chapter 8 Specifications 335 Waveforms 336 Waveform Characteristics 336 Common Characteristics 337 Modulation 337 Sweep 338 Burst 338 Trigger Characteristics 338 Programming Times 338 General 839 Product Dimensions 340 Index 341 12 Quick Start One of the first things you will want to do with your function generator is to become acquainted with the front panel We have written the exercises in this chapter to prepare the instrument for use and help you get familiar with some of its front panel operations This chapter is divided into the following sections e To Prepare the Function Generator for Use on page 15 To Adjust the Carrying Handle on page 16 e To Set the Ou
40. LAN You can enter an IP address for the Agilent 33220A An IP address is actually a four byte integer expressed in the notation nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn in each case is a byte value from 000 to 255 You need not set an IP address if DHCP is in use However If the DHCP server fails to assign a valid IP address the currently configured IP Address setting is used e Contact your network administrator for a valid IP address to use for your function generator e Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad not the knob The IP address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front panel operation Press and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary The IP Address field appears There is no SCPI command to set an IP address Subnet Mask LAN Subnetting allows the network administrator to divide a network into smaller networks to simplify administration and to minimize network traffic The subnet mask indicates the portion of the host address to be used to indicate the subnet You need not set a subnet mask if DHCP is in use e Contact your network administrator to find out whether subnetting is being used and for the correct subnet mask e Enter the subnet mask using the numeric keypad not the knob e The subnet mask is stored in non volatile memory and does n
41. Perform a complete self test of the function generator Returns 0 PASS or 1 FAIL If the test fails one or more error messages will be generated to provide additional information on the failure Use the SYST ERR command to read the error queue see page 242 SYSTem VERSion Query the function generator to determine the present SCPI version Returns a string in the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year of the version and V represents a version number for that year e g 1997 0 SYSTem BEEPer Issue a single beep immediately SYSTem BEEPer STATe OFF ON SYSTem BEEPer STATe Disable or enable the tone heard when an error is generated from the front panel or over the remote interface The current selection is stored in non volatile memory The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON SYSTem KLOCk STATe OFF ON Set front panel keyboard lock OFF the default or ON With KLOC ON the front panel keyboard is locked including the key unless it has been excluded To lock the keyboard without locking the key send SYST KLOC EXCL LOC first before SYST KLOC ON SYSTem KLOCk EXCLude NONE LOCal e Setting EXCL NONE the default sets no exclusion and SYST KLOC ON locks the entire keyboard including the key e Setting EXCL LOC excludes the key and SYST KLOC ON locks the keyboard except the key 245 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Comma
42. The deviation can also be expressed in terms of duty cycle as a percentage referenced to the period of the pulse waveform which is called the duty cycle deviation In PWM the deviation of width or duty cycle is symmetrical around the pulse width or duty cycle of the original pulse waveform For example if you specify a pulse waveform with a 10 duty cycle and then specify PWM with a duty cycle deviation of 5 the modulated waveform will have a pulse that varies in duty cycle from 5 to 15 under control of the modulating waveform 331 Chapter 7 Tutorial Frequency Sweep Frequency Sweep Frequency sweeping is similar to FM but no modulating waveform is used Instead the function generator sets the output frequency based on either a linear or logarithmic function In a linear sweep the output frequency changes in a constant hertz per second manner In a logarithmic sweep the output frequency changes in a constant octaves per second or decades per second manner Logarithmic sweeps are useful for covering wide frequency ranges where resolution at low frequencies could be lost with a linear sweep You can generate a sweep using an internal trigger source or an external hardware trigger source When the internal source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified When the external source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware t
43. a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in frequency and with either linear or logarithmic spacing You can also configure the function generator to output a single sweep one pass from start frequency to stop frequency by applying an external or manual trigger The function generator can produce a frequency sweep for sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed For more information on the fundamentals of a sweep refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select Sweep The function generator will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off e Front Panel Operation You must enable sweep before setting up any of the other sweep parameters Press Seer to output a sweep using the present settings for frequency output amplitude and offset Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other parameters SWEep STATe OFF ON 99 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Start Frequency and Stop Frequency The start frequency and stop frequency set the upper and lower frequency bounds for the sweep The function generator begins at the start frequency sweeps to the stop frequency and then resets back to the start frequency Start and Stop frequencies 1 wHz to 20 MHz
44. are the power on default states provided you have not enabled the power down recall mode see Instrument State Storage in chapter 3 If you are a first time user of the SCPI language please refer to these sections to become familiar with the language before attempting to program the function generator 148 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary SCPI Command Summary Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming Square brackets indicate optional keywords or parameters Braces enclose parameters within a command string Triangle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must substitute a value e A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices The APPLy Commands see page 163 for more information APPLy SINusoid lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt SQUare lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt RAMP lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt PULSe lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt NOISe lt frequency DEF gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt DC lt frequency DEF gt lt amplitude gt DEF gt lt offset gt USER lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt APPLY This parameter has no effect for this command but you MUST specify a value or
45. at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the sync waveform equals the specified sweep time For frequency sweeps with Marker On the Syne signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency For a triggered burst the Sync signal is a TTL high when the burst begins The Sync signal is a TTL low at the end of the specified number of cycles may not be the zero crossing point if the waveform has an associated start phase For an infinite count burst the Sync signal is the same as for a continuous waveform For an externally gated burst the Sync signal follows the external gate signal However note that the signal will not go to a TTL low until the end of the last cycle may not be the zero crossing point if the waveform has an associated start phase Front Panel Operation Press and select the Syne softkey again to toggle between off and on Remote Interface Operation OUTPut SYNC OFF ON Setting is stored in non volatile memory 69 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Pulse Waveforms A shown below a pulse waveform consists of a period a pulse width a rising edge and a falling edge a Rise Time Fall Time Pulse Period Pulse period 200 ns to 2000 s The default is 1 ms e The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the e
46. be defeated If only a two contact electrical outlet is available connect the instrument s chassis ground screw see above to a good earth ground In This Book Quick Start Chapter 1 prepares the function generator for use and helps you get familiar with a few of its front panel features Front Panel Menu Operation Chapter 2 introduces you to the front panel menu and describes some of the function generator s menu features Features and Functions Chapter 3 gives a detailed description of the function generator s capabilities and operation You will find this chapter useful whether you are operating the function generator from the front panel or over the remote interface Remote Interface Reference Chapter 4 contains reference information to help you program the function generator over the remote interface Error Messages Chapter 5 lists the error messages that may appear as you are working with the function generator Each listing contains information to help you diagnose and solve the problem Application Programs Chapter 6 contains several remote interface application programs to help you develop programs for your application Tutorial Chapter 7 discusses the fundamentals of signal generation and modulation techniques Specifications Chapter 8 lists the function generator s specifications lf you have questions relating to the operation of the Agilent 33220A call 1 800 452 4844 in the United States or contact
47. built in waveforms a Cannot overwrite a built in waveform error is generated e The function generator does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB_1 and arb 1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case 232 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands Ifyou copy to a waveform name that already exists the previous os waveform is overwritten and no error will be generated However you cannot overwrite any of the five built in waveforms he Up to four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory If memory is full and you try to copy a new waveform to non volatile memory a Not enough memory error is generated Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory The default selection is EXP RISE The following statement shows how to use the DATA COPY command to copy the VOLATILE waveform into named storage ARB_1 DATA COPY ARB 1 VOLATILE FUNCtion USER lt arb name gt VOLATILE FUNCtion USER Select one of the five built in arbitrary waveforms one of four user defined waveforms or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory The USER query returns EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG RAMP SINC
48. burst 219 number of errors allowed 242 numeric entry 5 nyquist sampling theorem 315 Index offset amplitude limitations 60 167 177 arb waveform limitations 167 arbitrary waveform limitations 61 177 front panel selection 20 load limitations 60 167 177 operation complete 246 OUTPut TRiIGger SLOPe command 214 223 226 TRiGger command 214 223 226 output connector 66 enable disable 66 181 polarity 67 output amplitude arb waveform limitations 166 arbitrary waveform limitations 59 176 dBm limitations 175 front panel selection 18 high low level 176 load limitations 58 165 175 offset limitations 58 175 range hold 66 tutorial description 322 unit limitations 58 units 62 duty cycle limitations 57 174 front panel selection 17 function limitations 57 164 174 output function allowed with modulation 55 amplitude limitations 56 frequency limitations 56 modulation modes allowed 172 pulse period limitations 186 output impedance 323 output load 63 output overload 181 output period front panel selection 17 output resistance 35 output termination 35 63 323 output units 62 dBm limitation 184 output waveform polarity 67 overheating 30 overload output 181 overload voltage 66 overview display 4 front panel 3 front panel menus 33 number entry 5 product 2 rear panel 6 overview programming 161 peak frequency deviation FM 83 96 97 195 peak voltage 325 peak to peak vo
49. by the FUNC PULS HOLD command see Pulse Configuration Commands on page 185 for further information The FUNC PULS HOLD command determines whether pulse width the default or pulse duty cycle values are to be held constant as the period is varied If the width is held so is the width deviation If the duty cycle is held so is the duty cycle deviation If duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are being held width deviation values specified with the PWM DEV command are automatically converted to the equivalent duty cycle deviation in percent PWM DEViation DCYCle lt deviation in percent gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation DCYCle MINimum MAXimum Set the duty cycle deviation in percent percent of period This value represents the peak variation in duty cycle from the duty cycle of the underlying pulse waveform For example if duty cycle is 10 and duty cycle deviation is 5 the duty cycle of the modulated waveform will vary from 5 to 15 The default is 1 percent MIN is approximately 0 MAX is approximately 100 limited by the period minimum pulse width and edge time The DEV DCYC query returns the duty cycle deviation in percent The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle e The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Duty Cycle Deviation lt Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle Deviation lt 100 Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period wher
50. conflict sweep turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 221 Settings conflict not able to modulate this function The function generator cannot generate an AM FM PM or FSK modulated waveform using the pulse noise or de voltage functions 281 221 221 221 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict PWM only available in pulse function The function generator cannot generate a PWM modulated waveform using any function other than pulse Settings conflict not able to sweep this function The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the pulse noise or de voltage functions Settings conflict not able to burst this function The function generator cannot generate a burst using the dc voltage function Settings conflict not able to modulate noise modulation turned off The function generator cannot generate a modulated waveform using the noise function The selected modulation mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to sweep pulse sweep turned off The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the pulse function The sweep mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to modulate dc modulation turned of
51. decimal points and scientific notation Special values for numeric parameters like MINimum MAXimum and DEFault are also accepted You can also send engineering unit suffixes with numeric parameters e g Mhz or Khz If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will automatically round the input numeric parameters The following command uses a numeric parameter FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Discrete Parameters Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values like BUS IMMediate EXTexrnal They have a short form and a long form just like command keywords You can mix upper and lower case letters Query responses will always return the short form in all upper case letters The following command uses discrete parameters SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false For a false condition the function generator will accept OFF or 0 For a true condition the function generator will accept ON or 1 When you query a boolean setting the instrument will always return 0 or 1 The following command uses a boolean parameter AM STATe OFF ON String Parameters String parameters can contain virtually any set of ASCII characters A string must begin and end with matching quotes either with a single quote or a double quote You can include th
52. deviation PWM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the internal modulation source is selected PWM SOUR INT command The carrier must be a pulse waveform for PWM The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 aus cycle i Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry e Select FRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry a Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform a with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 204 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands PWM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum PWM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PWM SOUR INT command Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in hertz PWM DEViation lt deviation in seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse width deviation
53. deviation in hertz Carrier Max Deviation aaa ee For Carrier lt 10 MHz Max Deviation Max Frequency lt Sarnior For Carrier gt 10 MHz The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the deviation will be adjusted as described The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 6 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to set the deviation to a value that is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the deviation will be adjusted as described 195 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands e Ifthe deviation causes the carrier waveform to exceed a frequency boundary for the current duty cycle square waveform only the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From th
54. front panel selection 20 load limitations 60 167 177 de voltage 176 front panel selection 20 DC volts setting 22 DDS 313 decimal point 133 default settings 145 degrees 220 delete arb waveforms 236 delete stored states 240 depth AM 192 depth AM modulation 328 devation FM 96 97 195 devation PM 199 deviation FM 83 deviation FM modulation 329 device clear 271 DHCP On Off 136 digits separator 133 dimensions product 340 direct digital synthesis 313 DISPlay TEXT CLEar command 244 TEXT command 244 display 243 contrast 131 displaying message 132 244 enable disable 132 243 number format 133 overview 4 display brightness 131 display bulb saver mode 130 DISPlay command 243 display graph mode 25 DNS server 139 domain name 139 duty cycle 64 definition 64 180 frequency limitations 57 64 174 180 front panel selection 23 modulation limits 180 E edge time 189 definition 189 edge time pulse 24 73 end or identify message 269 EOI 269 error on phase unlock 249 error messages 273 errors 129 242 data out of range errors 287 settings conflict errors 278 arbitrary waveform errors 299 calibration errors 298 device dependent errors 293 execution errors 278 instrument errors 295 number allowed 242 _ query errors 294 self test errors 296 343 Index examples SOURce command 194 front panel operation 40 42 programming 301 exponential fall waveform 228 exponential rise waveform 228 e
55. generated Use the DATA COPY st command to copy the waveform to non volatile memory gt Up to four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory as well as the five built in waveforms e After downloading the waveform data to memory use the FUNC USER command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command to output it The following statement shows how to use the DATA command to download seven points to volatile memory DATA VOLATILE Ly 67r sody Up ese rG y ot 229 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA DAC VOLATILE lt binary block gt lt value gt lt value gt Download binary or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 into volatile memory You can download from 1 to 65 536 64K points per waveform in JEEE 488 2 binary block format or as a list of values The range of values corresponds to the values available using internal 14 bit DAC Digital to Analog Converter codes The function generator takes the specified number of points and expands them to fill waveform memory If you download less than 16 384 16K points a waveform with 16 384 points is automatically generated If you download more than 16
56. generated if you specify a name with more than 12 characters An example is shown below MEM STATE NAME 1 TEST WFORM 1 e From the front panel you cannot assign a custom name to storage location 0 If you do not specify a name note that the name parameter is optional the default name is assigned to that state This provides a way to clear a name however the stored state is not deleted e The function generator will not prevent you from assigning the same name to different storage locations For example you can assign the same name to locations 1 and 2 MEMory STATe DELete 0 1 2 3 4 Delete the contents of the specified storage location If you have assigned a user defined name to a location MEM STAT NAME command this command also removes the name that you assigned and restores the default name AUTO_RECALL STATE_1 STATE_2 etc Note that you cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty An error is generated if you attempt to recall a deleted state 240 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands MEMory STATe RECall AUTO OFF ON MEMory STATe RECal1l1 AUTO Disable or enable the automatic recall of the power down state from storage location 0 when power is turned on Select ON to automatically recall the power down state when power is turned on Select OFF default to issue a reset RST command when powe
57. generator Although the APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator the low level commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER FUNCtion Select the output function The selected waveform is output using the previously selected frequency amplitude and offset voltage settings The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP PULS NOIS DC or USER Ifyou select USER the function generator outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC USER command e The table below shows which output functions are allowed with modulation sweep and burst Each indicates a valid combination If you change to a function that is not allowed with modulation sweep or burst the modulation or mode is turned off Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise DC User er e a e arrier meari Sweeps gt d i Burst Mode Allowed in the External Gated burst mode only 172 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands e Function Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum frequency is less than that of the current function the frequency is adjusted to the maximum value for the new function For example if you are currently outputting a 20 MHz sine wave and then change to the ramp function th
58. have to use all 12 characters but the first character must always be a letter CALibration COUNt Query the instrument to determine the number of times it has been calibrated Note that your instrument was calibrated before it left the factory When you receive your instrument from the factory be sure to read the count to determine its initial value The calibration count is stored in non volatile memory The count increments up to a maximum of 65 535 after which it rolls over to 0 Since the value increments by one for each calibration point a complete calibration may increase the value by many counts CALibration STRing lt quoted string gt CALibration STRing Store a message in non volatile calibration memory Storing a message will overwrite any message previously stored in memory The STR query reads the calibration message and returns a quoted string The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters additional characters are truncated An example is shown below CAL STR Cal Due 01 June 2003 e You can record a calibration message only from the remote interface and only when the instrument is unsecured You can read the message either from the front panel or over the remote interface You can read the calibration message whether the instrument is secured or unsecured 265 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language An Introduction to the SCPI La
59. in seconds This value represents the variation in width Gin seconds from the pulse width of the carrier pulse waveform The default is 10 us MIN 0s MAX 1000 s limited by the period minimum pulse width and edge time The DEV query returns the pulse width deviation in seconds e The pulse width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width The pulse width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Win Width Deviation lt Pulse Width Wmin and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width Wmin where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100s Wmin 2 ps for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 ys for period gt 1000 s e The pulse width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting Width Deviation lt Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time 205 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands Ifyou select the External modulating source PWM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the width deviation to 10 us then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 10 ps deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce negative deviation Note The operation of the PWM DEV command ts affected
60. information VOLTage RANGe AUTO OFF ON ONCE VOLTage RANGe AUTO Disable or enable voltage autoranging for all functions In the default mode autoranging is enabled CON and the function generator automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and attenuators With autoranging disabled OFF the function generator uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings The AUTO query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging CON The advantage of disabling autoranging is to eliminate momentary disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude However the amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below the expected range change The ONCE parameter has the same effect as turning autoranging ON and then OFF This parameter allows you to make a one time change to the amplifier attenuator setting before returning to the VOLT RANG AUTO OFF setting 179 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle MINimum MAXimum Set the duty cycle percentage for square waves Duty cycle represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level
61. kHz Pulse 500 uHz 5 MHz Noise DC Not Applicable Not Applicable PPN Arbs 1 Hz 6 MHz Function Limitations The frequency limits are function dependent as shown in the above table If you send a command specifying a frequency that is not in the appropriate range for the current function an error will occur For example if the current function is ramp and you send the command FREQ 20 MHz a Data out of range error is generated and the frequency is set to 200 kHz which is the maximum for a ramp waveform Duty Cycle Limitations For square waveforms the function generator may not be able to use the full range of duty cycle values at higher frequencies as shown below 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz If you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described 174 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands voLTage lt amplitude gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage MINimum MAXimum Set the output amplitude The default amplitude
62. level keyword You must insert a blank space to separate a parameter from a command keyword If a command requires more than one parameter you must separate adjacent parameters using a comma as shown below APPL SIN 5 KHZ 23 0 VPP 2 5 V A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing For example sending the following command string FREQ START 10 STOP 1000 is the same as sending the following two commands PREQO START 10 RPREO STOP 1000 Use a colon and a semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if you do not use both the colon and semicolon SWE STAT ON TRIG SOUR EXT Using the MIN and MAX Parameters You can substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for many commands For example consider the following command PREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Instead of selecting a specific frequency you can substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value 268 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language Querying Parameter Settings You can query the current value of most parameters by adding a question mark to the command For example the following command sets the output frequency to 5 kHz FREO 5000 You can then query the frequency v
63. only with an infinite burst count Duty Cycle Limitations For square waveforms the function generator may not be able to use the full range of duty cycle values at higher frequencies as shown below 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz If you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency 57 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Front Panel Operation To set the output frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency To set the waveform period instead press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Output Amplitude The default amplitude is 100 mVpp Gnto 50 ohms for all functions 58 Offset Voltage Limitations The relationship between output amplitude and offset voltage is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 509 lo
64. output using the current frequency amplitude and offset voltage settings The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP PULS NOIS DC or USER e Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform e The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in SINC waveform does not use the full range of binary values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp Gnto 50 ohms Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 234 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA CATalog List the names of all waveforms currently available for selection Returns the names of the five built in waveforms non volatile memory VOLATILE if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory and all user defined waveforms downloaded to non volatile memory A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as shown in the example below VOLATILE EXP RISE BXP PALL NEG RAMP SINC CARDIAC TEST1 ARB TEST2 ARB e Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the user defined w
65. returns the pulse width in seconds The minimum pulse width Wmin is affected by the period Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100s Wmin 2 ps for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s The specified pulse width must also be less than the difference 7 between the period and the minimum pulse width as shown below it The function generator will adjust the pulse edge time and then the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the pulse width will be adjusted as described Pulse Width lt Period Wmin The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the period and the edge time as shown below The function generator will limit the pulse edge time first and then the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the pulse width will be limited as described Pulse Width lt Period 1 6 X Edge Time The pulse width must also be greater than the total time of one edge as shown below Pulse Width gt 1 6 X Edge Time Note This function is affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value See t
66. same time Settings conflict frequency reduced for user function For arbitrary waveforms the output frequency is limited to 6 MHz When you change to the arbitrary waveform function APPL USER or FUNC USER command from a function that allows a higher frequency the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 6 MHz Settings conflict frequency changed for pulse function For pulse waveforms the output frequency is limited to 5 MHz When you change to the pulse function APPL PULS or FUNC PULS command from a function that allows a higher frequency the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 5 MHz Settings conflict frequency reduced for ramp function For ramp waveforms the output frequency is limited to 200 kHz When you change to the ramp function APPL RAMP or FUNC RAMP command from a function that allows a higher frequency the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 200 kHz Settings conflict frequency made compatible with burst mode For an internally triggered burst the output frequency is limited to a minimum of 2 mHz The function generator has adjusted the frequency to be compatible with the current settings Settings conflict burst turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode
67. settings has detected a checksum error This error may be the result of a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields Queue overflow The error queue is full because more than 20 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue The error queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command 293 410 420 430 440 Chapter 5 Error Messages Query Errors Query Errors Query INTERRUPTED A command was received but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is lost Query UNTERMINATED The function generator was addressed to talk i e to send data over the interface but a command has not been received which sends data to the output buffer For example you may have executed an APPLy command which does not generate data and then attempted an Enter statement to read data from the interface Query DEADLOCKED A command was received which generates too much data to fit in the output buffer and the input buffer is also full Command execution continues but all data is lost Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response The IDN command must be the last query command within a command string Example IDN SYST VERS 294 eer 501 to 502
68. softkey again to toggle to the Infinite softkey press once to start the waveform and a second time to stop it Remote Interface Operation BURSt NCyCles lt cycles gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum 110 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Period The burst period defines time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst Used in the internal triggered burst mode only Keep in mind that burst period is different than the waveform frequency which specifies the frequency of the bursted signal Burst period 1 us to 500 seconds The default is 10 ms The burst period setting is used only when Internal triggering is enabled The burst period is ignored when manual or external triggering is enabled or when the gated burst mode is selected e Itis not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the function generator to output with the specified burst count and frequency see below If the burst period is too short the function generator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously re trigger the burst Burst Count 200 ns Burst Peri tenis Evra Waveform Frequency Front Panel Operation To set the burst period press the Burst Period softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the period Remote Interface Operation BURSt INTernal PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum lli Chapter 3 Features and Functions ae Burst Mode 3
69. the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 81 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for FM e Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine Square has 50 duty cycle En Ramp has 100 symmetry a e Triangle has 50 symmetry a e Negative ramp has 0 symmetry fee You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform e Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation Front Panel Operation After enabling FM press the Shape softkey Remote Interface Operation FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for FM e Modulating frequency internal source 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz Front Panel Operation Aft
70. the following page On each clock cycle the constant loaded into the phase increment register PIR is added to the present result in the phase accumulator The most significant bits of the phase accumulator output are used to address waveform memory By changing the PIR constant the number of clock cycles required to step through the entire waveform memory changes thus changing the output frequency The PIR determines how fast the phase value changes with time and thereby controls the frequency being synthesized More bits in the phase accumulator result in finer frequency resolution Since the PIR affects only the rate of change of the phase value and not the phase itself changes in waveform frequency are phase continuous 314 Chapter 7 Tutorial Direct Digital Synthesis Phase increment Register PIR A X ed 50 MHz MSBs 14 or 16bit Waveform Memory Address Phase Accumulator Circuitry The 33220A uses a 64 bit phase accumulator which yields 2 64 x 50 MHz or 2 7 picohertz frequency resolution internally Note that only the 14 or 16 most significant bits of the Phase Register are used to address waveform memory Therefore when synthesizing low frequencies ess than 3 05 kHz for a typical 16K point waveform the address will not change in every clock cycle However at higher frequencies greater than 3 05 kHz the address will change by more than one location during each clock cycle and some points w
71. the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the PWM INT FREQ command 5 Set the pulse width or pulse duty cycle deviation Set the Width Deviation to a value from 0 to the current Pulse Width or Period Pulse Width whichever is smaller using the PWM DEV command Or set the Duty Cycle Deviation to a value from 0 to the current Duty Cycle or 100 Duty Cycle whichever is smaller using the PWM DEV DCYC command 6 Enable PWM modulation After you have set up the other modulation parameters use the PWM STAT ON command to enable PWM 203 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands PWM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivaient FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform PWM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PWM SOURCe Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e Ifyou select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The pulse width or pulse duty cycle deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the pulse width deviation to 50 us using the PWM DEV command then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 50 us width increase Lower external signal levels produce less
72. the polarity of the external gate signal on the Trig In connector The default is NORM true high logic BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted 108 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Waveform Frequency The waveform frequency defines the repetition rate of the burst waveform in the triggered and external gated modes In the triggered mode the number of cycles specified by the burst count is output at the waveform frequency In the external gated mode the waveform frequency is output when the external gate signal is true Keep in mind that the waveform frequency is different than the burst period which specifies the interval between bursts triggered mode only e Waveform frequency 1 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default waveform frequency is 1 kHz For an internally triggered burst waveform the minimum frequency is 2 mHz You can select a sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveform noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and de is not allowed For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count Front Panel Operation To set the waveform frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to sele
73. warranty obligations or liability for any Sample Application Files Agilent Technologies provides programming examples for illustration only All sample programs assume that you are familiar with the programming language being demonstrated and the tools used to create and debug procedures Agilent support engineers can help explain the functionality of Agilent software components and associated commands but they will not modify these samples to provide added functionality or construct procedures to meet your specific needs All of the sample application programs in this chapter are example programs intended for use with Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 and the Agilent VISA COM objects To use the IO object in another Visual Basic project 1 Set the reference to include the libraries in the Project References menu VISA COM 1 0 Type Library corresponds to VISACOM tlb e Agilent VISA COM Resource Manager 1 0 corresponds to AgtRM DLL e VISA COM 488 2 Formatted I O 1 0 corresponds to the BasicFormattediO dll 2 Create the formatted I O reference with a statement such as Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedIO488 3 Use Set Fgen New VisaComLib FormattedIO0488 to create the actual object 303 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Program Listings Example A Simple Sine Waveform This program found in the Examples chapter6 SimpleSine subdirectory on the CD ROM selects the function as sine
74. will not see the new IP address until you press the Refresh button Try the Agilent 33220A Web Interface The Agilent 33220A provides a web interface resident in the instrument You can use this interface over the LAN to view and modify the instrument s I O configuration Also a remote front panel interface is provided which allows you to control the instrument over the network To access and use the web interface 1 Establish LAN interface connectivity from your PC to the 33220A 2 Open your PC s web browser 3 To launch the web interface enter the IP address of the instrument or its fully qualified host name in the browser address field 4 Follow the directions in the web interface s online help For further information see the Agilent Technologies USB LAN GPIB Connectivity Guide which you can download from the Agilent web site at the following URL www agilent com find connectivity 140 a Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview Calibration Overview This section gives a brief introduction to the calibration features of the function generator For a more detailed discussion of the calibration procedures see chapter 4 in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Calibration Security This feature allows you to enter a security code to prevent accidental or unauthorized calibrations of the function generator When you first receive your function generator it is secured Befor
75. your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office lf your 33220A fails within three years of purchase Agilent will either repair or replace it free of charge Call 1 877 447 7278 in the United States and ask for Agilent Express or contact your local Agilent Technologies Sales Office OREN NON cate Seg weg we Kenny wm cette o9 o Oey apea og on seep seaseg seasg maneey ermensesee ne sesemecnmeermesesemsmmner semestemeneney menessnseremmsmnsnseasmecnenseomes sesnemese emacs se sesesese g Bem Hmesenemey emesmemeeeneesee se saca op sesaraeeets oo e TT ete PEPE TAS erry is ee ER ences ead Bas costar Se sari one wees tte eesse 88 sesse nere METET oe wees wt tee wee wt wee siala Diea atte orem atte eal Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start 13 To Prepare the Function Generator for Use 15 To Adjust the Carrying Handle 16 To Set the Output Frequency 17 To Set the Output Amplitude 18 To Set a DC Offset Voltage 20 To Set the High Level and Low Level Values 21 To Select DC Volts 22 To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave 23 To Configure a Pulse Waveform 24 To View a Waveform Graph 25 To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform 26 To Use the Built In Help System 27 To Rack Mount the Function Generator 29 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation 31 Front Panel Menu Reference 33 To Select the Output Termination 35 To Reset the Function Generator 35 To Output a Modulated Waveform
76. 0 symmetry ieee You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation Front Panel Operation After enabling AM press the Shape softkey e Remote Interface Operation AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for AM Modulating frequency internal source 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 100 Hz Front Panel Operation After enabling AM press the AM Freq softkey Remote Interface Operation AM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 16 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Modulation Depth The modulation depth is expressed as a percentage and represents the extent of the amplitude variation At 0 depth the output amplitude is half of the selected value At 100 depth the output amplitude equals the selected value Modulation depth 0 to 120 The default is 100 e Note that even at greater than 100 depth the function generator will not exceed 5V peak on the output into a 50Q load e Ifyou select the External modulating source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform Th
77. 00 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 ps for period gt 1000 s 188 ELT A TE E Da Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands e The specified pulse duty cycle may affect the edge time The edge time is adjusted first and then the duty cycle to accommodate the specified period conforming to the following restriction From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the edge time and duty cycle will be limited as described Duty Cycle gt 100 X 1 6 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 1 6 X Edge Time Period Note This command ts affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value See the FUNC PULS HOLD command for further information FUNCtion PULSe TRANsition lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe TRANsition MINimum MAXimum Set the edge time in seconds for both the rising and falling edges The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold of each edge You can vary the edge time from 5 ns to 100 ns see restrictions below The default edge time is 5 ns MIN 5 ns MAX 100 ns The TR
78. 01 or the ADC input buffer amplifier 0 702 Self test failed internal ADC measurement error This error indicates a probable ADC failure The failure could be of the system ADC U703 the ADC input multiplexer U701 or the ADC input buffer amplifier U702 Self test failed square pulse DAC test failure This error indicates a probable failure of the square pulse DAC U1002 297 701 702 703 706 707 850 851 Chapter 5 Error Messages Calibration Errors Calibration Errors The following errors indicate failures that may occur during a calibration For more information on the calibration procedures see chapter 4 in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Calibration error security defeated by hardware jumper The function generator s calibration security feature has been disabled by temporarily shorting the two CAL ENABLE pads on the internal circuit board as described in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Calibration error calibration memory is secured A calibration cannot be performed when calibration memory is secured To unsecure the instrument use the CAL SEC STAT ON command with the correct security code Calibration error secure code provided was invalid The security code specified with the CAL SEC STAT ON command is invalid Calibration error provided value is out of range The calibration value specified with the CAL VAL command is out of range Calibration error signal in
79. 02 020 Subnet Mask 255 255 000 000 Default Gateway 000 000 000 000 e DNS Server e 000 000 000 000 e Host Name none Domain Name e none Calibration Factory Setting Calibration State Secured Parameters marked with a bullet are stored in non volatile memory 146 Remote Interface Reference Remote Interface Reference e SCPI Command Summary on page 149 gt p Simplified Programming Overview on page 161 Using the APPLy Command on page 163 Output Configuration Commands on page 172 e Pulse Configuration Commands on page 185 Amplitude Modulation AM Commands on page 190 Frequency Modulation FM Commands on page 193 e Phase Modulation PM Commands on page 197 e Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands on page 182 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands on page 185 Frequency Sweep Commands on page 208 Burst Mode Commands on page 216 e Triggering Commands on page 224 Arbitrary Waveform Commands on page 227 e State Storage Commands on page 238 System Related Commands on page 242 Interface Configuration Commands on page 247 Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only on page 248 The SCPI Status System on page 250 Status Reporting Commands on page 260 Calibration Commands on page 264 An Introduction to the SCPI Language on page 266 Using Device Clear on page 271 Throughout this manual default states and values are identified These
80. 100 kHz External Modulation input 6 for AM FM PM PWM Voltage Range input Resistance Bandwidth Sweep Waveforms Type Direction Sweep Time Trigger Marker Burst l Waveforms Type Start Stop Phase internal Period Gate Source Trigger Source 5 V full scale kQ typical DC to 20 kHz Sine Square Ramp Arb Linear or Logarithmic Up or Down 1 ms to 500s Single External or internal Falling edge of Sync signal programmable frequency Sine Square Ramp Triangle Pulse Noise Arb Counted 1 to 50 000 cycles Infinite Gated 360 to 360 degrees 1 us to 500s External Trigger 338 single External or internaj Trigger Characteristics Trigger Input Input Level TTL compatible Slope Rising or falling selectable Pulse Width gt 100 ns Input Impedance gt 10 kQ DC coupled Latency lt 500 ns Jitter RMS 6 ns 3 5 ns for Pulse Trigger Output Level TTL compatible into gt 1kQ Puise Width gt 400 ns Output Impedance 50 Q typical Maximum Rate 1 MHz Programming Times typical Configuration Times us iN GP Function Frequency Change Amplitude Change 36 ms 36 ms 36 ms Select User 111 ms 112 ms 409 ms Arb Download Times binary transfer Jos n p e Download times do not include setup or output time General Power Supply Power Consumption Operating Environment Operating Temperature
81. 36 To Output an FSK Waveform 38 To Output a PWM Waveform 40 To Output a Frequency Sweep 42 To Output a Burst Waveform 44 To Trigger a Sweep or Burst 46 To Store the Instrument State 47 To Configure the Remote Interface 48 Chapter 3 Features and Functions 53 Output Configuration 55 Pulse Waveforms 70 Amplitude Modulation AM 74 Frequency Modulation FM 79 Phase Modulation PM 85 Frequency Shift Keying ESK Modulation 89 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 93 Frequency Sweep 99 Burst Mode 106 9O O pmp D pap Contents Triggering 115 Arbitrary Waveforms 120 System Related Operations 126 Remote Interface Configuration 135 Calibration Overview 141 Factory Default Settings 145 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference 147 SCPI Command Summary 149 Simplified Programming Overview 161 _ Using the APPLy Command 163 Output Configuration Commands 172 Pulse Configuration Commands 185 Amplitude Modulation AM Commands 190 Frequency Modulation FM Commands 193 Phase Modulation PM Commands 197 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands 200 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands 203 Frequency Sweep Commands 208 Burst Mode Commands 216 Triggering Commands 224 Arbitrary Waveform Commands 227 State Storage Commands 238 System Related Commands 242 Interface Configuration Commands 247 Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only 248 The SCPI Status System 250 Status Reporting Commands 260 Calibration Commands 264 An
82. 384 points a 65 536 point waveform is generated e The values 8191 and 8191 correspond to the peak values of the waveform if the offset is 0 volts For example if you set the output amplitude to 10 Vpp 8191 corresponds to 5V and 8191 corresponds to 5V The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 8191 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms The DATA DAC command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile memory and no error will be generated Use the DATA COPY command to copy the waveform to non volatile memory Up to four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory as well as the five built in waveforms e After downloading the waveform data to memory use the FUNC USER command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command to output it 230 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands The following statement shows how to use the DATA DAC command to download seven integer points using the binary block format see also Using the IEEE 488 2
83. 57 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary System Related Commands see page 242 for more information SYSTem EBRRor TDN DISPlay OFF ON DISPlay DISPlay TEXT lt quoted string gt TEXT TEXT CLEar RST TST SYSTem VERSion syslem BERPer BEEPer STATe OFF ON BEEPer STATe sysTem KLOCk STATe OFF ON KLOCk EXCLude NONE LOCal SYSTem SECurity IMMediate Caution Clears all memory Not recom mended for routine applications LRN OPC OPC WAI Interface Configuration Commands see page 247 for more information SYSTem COMMunicate RLSTate LOCal REMote RWLock Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 158 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Phase Lock Commands These commands require Option 001 External Timebase Reference see page 248 for more information PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum PHASe MINimum MAXimum PHASe REFerence PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe OFF ON PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe Status Reporting Commands see page 260 for more information ad oe SRE lt enable value gt SRE STATUS QUEStionable CONDition QUEStionable EVENt QUEStionable ENABle lt enable value gt QUEStionable HNABLe ESR ESE lt enable value gt ESE CLS STATus PRESeL psc 0 1 PSC TOR Parame
84. AN query returns the edge time in seconds The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as shown below The function generator will limit the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse width or duty cycle From the remote interface a Settings Conflict error will be generated and the edge time will be limited as described Edge Time lt 0 625 X Pulse Width or in terms of duty cycle Edge Time lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 rie ee 189 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Amplitude Modulation AM Commands Amplitude Modulation AM Commands See also Amplitude Modulation starting on page 74 in chapter 8 AM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an AM waveform The commands used for AM are listed on the next page Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the AM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 below Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine sq
85. Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited to 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms While changing amplitude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators To prevent this disruption in the output you can disable the voltage autoranging feature as described on page 66 You can also set the amplitude with an associated offset voltage by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV For de volts the output level is actually controlled by setting the offset voltage You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vde into 50 ohms or 10 Vde into an open circuit See DC Offset Voltage on the following page for more information To select dc volts from the front panel press and then select the DC On softkey Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset voltage level Front Panel Operation To set the output amplitude press the Ampl softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired am
86. BUS When the Immediate internal source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified SWE TIME command plus 1 ms e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG SLOP command see page 214 Note that the trigger period must be greater than or equal to the specified sweep time plus 1 ms When the Bus software source is selected the function generator initiates one sweep each time a bus trigger command is received To trigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN send the TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger e The APPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to TRIG SOUR IMM command e To ensure synchronization when the Bus source is selected send the WAI wait command When the WAI command is executed the function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands For example the following command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized TRIG SOUR BUS TRG WAI TR
87. Binary Block Format below DATA DAC VOLATILE 214 Binary Data The following statement shows how to use the DATA DAC command to download five integer points in decimal format DATA DAC VOLATILE 8191 4096 0 4096 8191 Using the IEEE 488 2 Binary Biock Format In the binary block format a block header precedes the waveform data The block header has the following format 5 32768 Start of Even Number of Bytes to Follow Data Block 32 768 bytes 16 384 points Number of Digits to Follow The function generator represents binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent as two bytes Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform and must always be an even number For example 32 768 bytes are required to download a waveform with 16 384 points Use the FORM BORD command to select the byte order for binary transfers in block mode If you specify FORM BORD NORM default the most significant byte MSB of each data point is assumed first if you specify FORM BORD SWAP the least significant byte LSB of each data point is assumed first Most computers use the swapped byte order 231 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer Used for binary block transfers only Select the byte order for binary transfers in the block mode using the DATA DAC command The defa
88. CLEAR Number Format The function generator can show numbers on the front panel display with periods or commas for the decimal point and digits separator This feature is available from the front panel only LEH C 100 000 00 ie Cf Perieg jHilevel LoLeyvel Perigg iHitevel LoLewel Decimal Point Period Decimal Point Comma Digits Separator Comma Digits Separator None The number format is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory a period is used for the decimal point and commas are used for the digits separator e g 1 000 000 00 KHz e Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Number Format softkey from the System menu 133 Firmware Revision Query You can query the function generator to determine which revision of firmware is currently installed The revision code contains five numbers in the form f ff b bb aa p f ff Firmware revision number b bb Boot kernel revision number aa ASIC revision number p Printed circuit board revision number Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Cal Info softkey from the Test Cal menu The revision code is listed as one of the messages on the front panel display Remote Interface Operation Use the following command to read the function generator s firmware revision numbers be sure to dimension a string variable with at le
89. E 5 3 4 STATE CANCEL 2 Select a custom name for the selected location If desired you can assign a custom name to each of the four locations STATE_NEW State State State STORE 2 3 4 STATE CANCEL The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character _ To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob To delete all characters to the right of the cursor position press To use numbers in the name you can enter them directly from the numeric keypad Use the decimal point from the numeric keypad to add the underscore character _ to the name 3 Store the instrument state Press the STORE STATE softkey The instrument stores the selected function frequency amplitude de offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use The instrument does not store volatile waveforms created in the arbitrary waveform function ou 47 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote interface To Configure the Remote Interface The Agilent 33220A supports remote interface communication using a choice of three interfaces GPIB USB and LAN AH three interfaces are live at power up The instructions that follow tell how to configure your remote interface from the instrument front pane
90. ENT query returns the center frequency in hertz Center Frequency max Max Frequency Span The following equation shows the relationship between the center frequency and the start stop frequency j Center Frequency Stop Frequency Start Frequency FREQuency SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency SPAN MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency span used in conjunction with the center frequency Select from 0 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 900 Hz MIN 0 Hz MAX based on the center frequency and maximum frequency for the selected function The SPAN query returns the span in hertz can be a positive or negative value Frequency Span max 2 X Max Frequency Center Frequency e To sweep up in frequency set a positive frequency span To sweep down in frequency set a negative frequency span The following equation shows the relationship between the span and the start stop frequency Frequency Span Stop Frequency Start Frequency 211 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SWEep SPACing Select linear or logarithmic spacing for the sweep The default is Linear The SPAC query returns LIN or LOG e For a linear sweep the function generator varies the output frequency in a linear fashion during the sweep For a logarithmic sweep the fun
91. FUNC RAMP command Data out of range pulse frequency value clipped to upper limit This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the pulse waveform function APPL PULS or FUNC PULS command Data out of range burst period value clipped to This generic message indicates that the burst period has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range burst count value clipped to This generic message indicates that the burst count has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range burst period limited by length of burst value clipped to lower limit It is not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the function generator to output with the specified burst count and frequency see below If the burst period is too short the function generator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously re trigger the burst Burst Count a ZY TE Waveform Frequency ii Burst Period gt Data out of range burst count limited by length of burst value clipped to upper limit If the Immediate trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the burst count must be less than the product of the burst period and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Burst Period X Waveform Frequency 289 222 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Executio
92. Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Modulation FM A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform In FM the frequency of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform For more information on the fundamentals of Frequency Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select FM Modulation wed The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FM and AM at the same time When you enable FM the previous modulation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow FM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FM the sweep or burst mode is turned off Front Panel Operation You must enable FM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press and then select FM using the Type softkey The FM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage e Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters E FM STATe OFF ON 7 79 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Carrier Waveform Shape FM carrier shape Sime Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform The default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or de as the carrier wa
93. FormattedI0488 Set Fgen IO io mgr Open txtIoO Text Dim Waveform As String Dim I As Integer Dim DataStr As String ReDim Waveform To 4000 On Error GoTo MyError This program uses the arbitrary waveform function to download and output a square wave pulse with a calculated yise time and fall time The waveform consists of 4000 points downloaded to the function generator as ASCII data With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers IO Timeout 40000 Set timeout to 40 seconds for long download strings End With Compute waveform LXCELCYOLY Text txtError SelText Computing Waveform amp vbCrLf For I L To 5 Waveform I Str I i 5 Set rise time 5 points aan Next I For 6 To 205 Waveform T 1 Set pulse width 200 points Next I For I 206 To 210 Waveform Strs 210 I 5 Set fall time 5 points Next I For IE 211 To 4000 Waveform I 9 Set remaining points to zero Next I DataStr Join Waveform Create string from data array a Continued 309 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Download data points to volatile memory txtError SeiText Downloading Arb amp vbCrLf With Fgen WriteString DATA VOLATILE amp DataStr End With txtError SelText Download Complete amp vbCrLf Set up arbitrary wavef
94. G WAI You can use the OPC operation complete query command or the OPC operation complete command to signal when the sweep is complete The OPC command returns 1 to the output buffer when the sweep is complete The OPC command sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register when the sweep is complete 213 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands TRIiGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SLOPe Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger signal on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally triggered sweep The default is POS rising edge The SLOP query returns POS or NEG OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe Select a rising or falling edge for the trigger out signal When enabled using the OUTP TRIG command see below a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep Select POS to output a pulse with a rising edge or select NEG to output a pulse with a falling edge The default is POS The SLOP query returns POS or NEG When the Immediate internal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle the rising edge is the sweep trigger from the Trig Out connector The p
95. MAXimum PREQuency MINimum MAXimum z DEPTh lt depth in percent gt MINimum MAXimum DEPTh MINimum MAXimum AM AM AM SOURce INTernal EXTernal AM SOURCe AM AM STATe OFF ON STATe FM Commands FM iINTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion FM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum FM DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum FM DEViation MINimum MAXimum FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal FM SOURCe FM STATe OFF ON a FM STATe i Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 152 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPi Command Summary PM Commands PM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCt ion PM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum PM DEViation lt deviation in degrees gt MINimum MAXimum PM DEViation MINimum MAXimum PM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PM SOURce PM STATe OFF ON PM STATe FSK Commands FSKey FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey FREQuency MINimum MAXimum FSKey INTernal RATE lt rate in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey INTernal RATE MINimum MAXimum FSKey SOURce INTernal EXTernal FSKey SOURce FSKey STATe OFF ON FSKey STATe PWM Commands PWM INTernal FUNCtion S INusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangl
96. MAXimum Set the internal modulation depth or percent modulation in percent Select from 0 to 120 The default is 100 MIN 0 MAX 120 The DEPT query returns the modulation depth in percent e Note that even at greater than 100 depth the function generator will not exceed 5V peak on the output into a 50Q load e Ifyou select the External modulating source AM SOUR EXT command the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 using the AM DEPT command then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude AM STATe OFF ON AM STAT e Disable or enable AM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow AM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable AM the sweep or burst mode is turned off
97. Operation After enabling PM press the Source softkey Remote Interface Operation PM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 88 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation You can configure the function generator to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector For more information on the fundamentals of FSK Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select FSK Modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FSK and AM at the same time When you enable FSK the previous modulation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow FSK to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FSK the sweep or burst mode is turned off e Front Panel Operation You must enable FSK before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press and then select FSK using the Type softkey The FSK waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enab
98. Other commands cannot be executed until this command completes WAT Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface 246 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Interface Configuration Commands Interface Configuration Commands See also Remote Interface Configuration on page 135 in chapter SY STem COMMunicate RLSTate LOCal REMote RWLock Set the remote local state of the function generator over the LAN interface from a Telnet or socket session Provides control analogous to the IEEE 488 2 commands such as GTL Go To Local over the GPIB and USB interfaces e LOCal The default Sets the instrument state to local Removes any annunciator and unlocks the front panel keyboard e REMote Sets the instrument state to remote Displays the remote annunciator and locks the keyboard except the key e RWLock Sets the instrument state to remote with lock Displays the rwi annunciator and locks the keyboard including the key 247 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only The rear panel 10 MHz In and 10 MHz Out connectors present only if Option 001 is installed allow synchronization between multiple Agilent 33220A function generators see connection diagram below or to an external 10 MHz clock signal You can also control the phase offset from the front panel or over the remote in
99. PER command e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator outputs the specified number of cycles each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG SLOP command see page 222 External trigger signals that occur during a burst are ignored 22l Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Burst Mode Commands e When the Bus software source is selected the function generator outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received To trigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN send the TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger e When the External or Bus trigger source is selected the burst count and burst phase remain in effect but the burst period is ignored The APPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to TRIG SOUR IMM command e To ensure synchronization when the Bus source is selected send the WATI wait command When the WAI command is executed the function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands For example the following command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized TRIG SOUR BU
100. Query the arithmetic average of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform 1 lt average lt 1 The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command Ifyou query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTRibute CFACtor lt arb name gt Query the crest factor of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform Crest factor is the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value of the waveform The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command Ifyou query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTRibute POINts lt arb name gt Query the number of points in the specified arbitrary waveform Returns a value from 1 to 65 536 points The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command e Ifyou query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTRibute PTPeak lt arb name gt Query the peak to peak value of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command e This command returns a value from 0 to 1 0 with 1 0
101. S TRG WAI TRG WAT You can use the OPC operation complete query command or the OPC operation complete command to signal when the burst is complete The OPC command returns 1 to the output buffer when the burst is complete The OPC command sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register when the burst is complete TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SLOPe Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger signal on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally triggered burst The default is POS rising edge The SLOP query returns POS or NEG are Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted BURSt GATE POLarity Select whether the function generator uses true high or true low logic levels on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally gated burst The default is NORM true high logic The POL query returns NORM or INV OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe Select a rising or falling edge for the trigger out signal When enabled using the OUTP TRIG command see below a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst Select POS to output a pulse with a rising edge or select NEG to output a pulse with a fall
102. SONU Us ess Mitte B CTS R EG BORGER EOE AR A E A dere eaters AA EEEE EATE EAEI ET SENSES E E RAE EEST aaa z pote a RAAST EA ap as rae een Koyo tieri ty Bese nee esy x SEARE PAAPAA IATA A SE ONSA ZSS LSS Nh EERS A Se he E EA T E A N E AmA Aan e DA E 50 to 50 Thresholds 10 to 90 Thresholds SCPI Command Summary imum LMU MAX tmuUmM Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference MINimum MAXimum imum imum t Lum LmuMm MAX TRANsition lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum MINimum MAX MAX Imum DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAX t MINimum l ion WIDTh Dcycle WIDTh lt seconds gt MINimum MAX iod PULSe HOLD WIDTh DcYCle PERiod lt seconds gt MIN Pulse Configuration Commands PER HOLD WIDTh MIN DCYCle TRANsit PULSE PULSE FUNCtion mi 4 3 Q2 Pe Y Nal z N x 3 Qs me P ans e2 B ey w gt Y Ta YY H Pad 3 it ri ae amp 3 ni 2 Q J Q z Aa see page 185 for more information 151 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Modulation Commands see page 190 for more information AM Commands AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum
103. TILE FUNCt ion USER FUNCtion USER FUNCtion DATA CATalog NVOLatile CATalog NVOLatile FREE DATA DELete lt arb name gt DATA DELete ALL DATA ATTRibute AVERage lt arb name gt ATTRibute CFACtor lt arb name gt ATTRibute POINts lt arb name gt ATTRibute PTPeak lt arbname gt The names of the built in arb waveforms are EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG_RAMP SINC and CARDIAC Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 156 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Triggering Commands see page 224 for more information These commands are used for Sweep and Burst only TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal Bus TRIGger SOURCE TRIGger TRG TRIiGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig In Connector TRIGger SLOPe BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted External Gated Burst BURSt GATE POLarity OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe PpOSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger OFF ON TRIGger State Storage Commands see page 238 for more information SAV 0 112 314 State 0 is the instrument state at power down RCL 0 1 2 314 States 1 through 4 are user defined states MEMory STATE NAME 0 1 2 NAME 0 1 2 DELete 0 1 RECallL AUTO RECall AUTO VALid 0 1 2 3 4 MEMory NSTates lt name gt Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 1
104. UTPut LOAD 50 WriteString FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe WriteString FREQuency 5000 WriteString VOoLTage LOW 0 WriteString VOLTage HIGH 5 WriteString FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle 35 Begin with 35 duty cycle WriteString PWM INTernal FUNCtion TRiangie Modulating waveshape is triangle WriteString PWM INTernal FREQuency 2 Modulation frequency is 2 Hz WriteString PWM DEViation DCYCle 15 Modulation depth is 15 WriteString PWM SOURce INTernal Use internal signal for modulation Tf using an external signal for PWM connect the signal to the rear panel BNC and use the command PWM SOURce EXTernal Output termination is 50 Ohms Carrier waveshape is pulse Carrier frequency is 5 kHz Set parameters to 5 V TTL WriteString PWM STATe ON Turn PWM modulation on WriteString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output End With Exit Sub MyYError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 308 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Downloading an Arbitrary Waveform ASCII This program found in the Examples chapter6 ASCHarb subdirectory on the CD ROM downloads an arbitrary waveform to the function generator as ASCII data Data values are in the range 1 to 1 Private Sub cmdASCIIArb Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib Formattedlo04838 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib
105. Used Returns 0 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Loop Unlocked Function generator has lost phase lock Frequency accuracy will be affected Not Used Not Used Returns Q Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Calibration Error Error occurred during cai or cal memory lost or calibration is unsecured 9 External Reference External timebase is being used 10 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 11 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 12 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 13 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 14 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 15 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Q rif GOR a 6 Fi 8 256 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Questionable Data event register is cleared when e You execute the CLS clear status command e You query the event register using the STAT QUES EVEN command The Questionable Data enable register is cleared when e You turn on the power the PSC command does not apply e You execute the STAT PRES command e You execute the STAT QUES ENAB 0 command 297 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Standard Event Register The Standard Event register group reports the following types of events power on detected command syntax errors command execution errors self test or calibration errors query errors or the OPC command has been executed Any or all of these conditions c
106. _ e Use the knob to select each character Use the cursor key to move to the next character You can use the keypad for numbers e Use the key to delete all characters to the right starting at the cursor position The host name is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front panel operation Press and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select Host Name There is no SCPI command to set a host name 138 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Domain Name LAN A domain name is a registered name on the Internet which is translated into an IP address Contact your network administrator for the correct domain name e Enter the domain name using the knob and cursor keys Each character in the name can be a letter a through z number dash _ or period i e Use the knob to select each character Use the cursor key to move to the next character You can use the keypad for numbers e Use the key to delete all characters to the right starting at the cursor position The host name is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front panel operation Press and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select Domain Name There is no SCPI command to set a domain name
107. ace This error indicates that the cross isolation interface between the main Processor U101 and the synthesis IC U501 has failed or that the synthesis IC itself has failed 619 Self tes failed leading edge DAC 620 Self test failed trailing edge DAC 621 Self test failed square wave threshold DAC 623 Self test failed de offset DAC 624 Self test failed nul DAC 625 Self test failed amplitude DAC These errors indicate a malfunctioning system DAC U801 or failed DAC multiplexer U803 channels Self test failed time base Calibration DAC This error indicates that the time base calibration DAC in the synthesis IC U50 1 or voltage controlled oscillator 0602 has failed 626 to 629 630 631 632 Chapter 5 Error Messages Self Test Errors 626 Self test failed waveform filter path select relay 627 Self test failed 10 dB attenuator path 628 Self test failed 20 dB attenuator path 629 Self test failed 20 dB amplifier path These errors indicate that the specified relay is not being properly switched or the attenuator amplifier is not providing the expected attenuation or gain These self tests use the mternal ADC to verify that the output path relays output amplifier 20 dB and output attenuators are operating properly Self test failed internal ADC over range condition This error indicates a probable ADC failure The failure could be of the system ADC U708 the ADC input multiplexer 07
108. ach point in the waveform When creating a new waveform the previous waveform in volatile memory is overwritten Set the waveform period Press the Cycle Period softkey to set the time boundaries for the waveform The time value of the last point that can be defined in the waveform must be less than the specified cycle period For this example set the period of the waveform to 10 ms 1f 000 000m M Cycle High Low Interp Init Edit Period Limit Limit Off Paints Points Set the waveform voltage limits Press the High V Limit and Low V Limit softkeys to set the upper and lower voltage levels that can be reached while editing the waveform The upper limit must be greater than the lower limit By default Point 1 is set equal to the upper limit and Point 2 is set equal to the lower limit For this example set the upper limit to 3 0 V and the lower limit to 0 V 000 0 V P Cyele l High Y f Low Irderp Init Edit Period Limit Lindt off Fonts Points 121 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms 5 Select the interpolation method Press the Interp softkey to enable or disable linear interpolation between waveform points this feature is available from the front panel only With interpolation enabled default the waveform editor makes a straight line connection between points With interpolation disabled the waveform editor maintains a constant voltage level between points and creates a
109. ad or 10 volts for a high impedance load Vpp lt 2X Vmax Voffset Limits Due to Output Termination If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude will be adjusted and no error will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half For more information see Output Termination on page 63 Limits Due to Units Selection In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms or dBm For more information see Output Units on page 62 You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp For more information see Output Units on page 62
110. ad to enter the desired rate Remote Interface Operation FSKey INTernal RATE lt rate in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum 91 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation FSK Source 92 FSK source Internal or External The default is Internal When the Internal source is selected the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and hop frequency is determined by the FSK rate specified When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output The maximum external FSK rate is 100 kHz Note that the connector used for externally controlled FSK waveforms Trig In is not the same connector that is used for externally modulated AM FM PM and PWM waveforms Modulation In When used for FSK the Trig In connector does not have adjustable edge polarity Front Panel Operation After enabling FSK press the Source softkey Remote Interface Operation FSKey SOURce INTernal ExTernal Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM In Pulse Width Modulation PWM the width of a pulse waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The width of the pulse can be expressed either as a p
111. again of Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output an FSK Waveform To Output an FSK Waveform You can configure the function generator to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector For this example you will set the carrier frequency to 3 kHz and the hop frequency to 500 Hz with an FSK rate of 100 Hz Select the function frequency and amplitude of the carrier Press and then press the Freq Ampi and Offset softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example select a 3 kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select FSK Press and then select FSK using the Type softkey Notice that a status message FSK is shown in the upper left corner of the display 38 Re wee wees ere E E Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output an FSK Waveform 8 Set the hop frequency Press the Hop Freq softkey and then set the value to 500 Hz using the numeric SODAN or the knob and cursor keys 4 Set the FSK shift rate Press the FSK Rate softkey and then set the value to 100 Hz using the numeric sd ag or the knob and cursor keys At this point the function generator outputs an FSK waveform if the
112. al Rise Exponential Fall Negative Ramp Cardiac 228 mo Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA VOLATILE lt value gt lt value gt Download floating point values from 1 to 1 into volatile memory You can download from 1 to 65 536 64K points per waveform The function generator takes the specified number of points and expands them to fill waveform memory If you download less than 16 384 16K points a waveform with 16 384 points is automatically generated If you download more than 16 384 points a 65 536 point waveform is generated e The values 1 and 1 correspond to the peak values of the waveform Cif the offset is 0 volts For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp OV offset 1 corresponds to 5V and 1 corresponds to 5V e The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms Downloading floating point values using DATA VOLATILE is slower than downloading binary values using DATA DAC VOLATILE but is more convenient when using trigonometric functions which return values from 1 to 1 The DATA command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile memory and no error will be
113. all other modes are turned off 280 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors 221 Settings conflict FSK turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 221 Settings conflict FM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 221 Settings conflict AM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 221 Settings conflict PM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 221 Settings conflict PWM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 221 Settings
114. alue by executing t FREQ t You can also query the minimum or maximum Monneuey allowed with the present function as follows FREQ MIN FREQ MAX SCPI Command Terminators A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with a lt new line gt character The IEEE 488 EOI End Or Identify message is interpreted as a lt new line gt character and can be used to terminate a command string in place of a lt new line gt character A lt carriage return gt followed by a lt new line gt is also accepted Command string termination will always reset the current SCPI command path to the root level IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The IEFEE 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands that perform functions such as reset self test and status operations Common commands always begin with an asterisk are three characters in length and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands as shown below H AROT CLS ESE 32 OPC 269 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language SCPI Parameter Types The SCPI language defines several different data formats to be used in program messages and response messages Numeric Parameters Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs
115. alun effect 324 beep enable disable 245 246 beeper 130 binary block format 231 binary download arbs 230 bit definitions questionable data register 256 standard event register 258 status byte register 252 blank display 130 block format binary 231 BNC Modulation In 78 84 92 98 brightness display 131 built in arb waveforms 228 built in arbitrary waveforms names 233 built in help system 27 bulb saver mode 130 bumpers removing 29 BURSt GATE POLarity command 223 225 INTernal PERiod command 220 MODE command 218 NCYCles command 219 PHASe command 220 STATe command 221 Burst 110 burst 106 burst count 110 burst count 219 burst period 111 220 burst phase 112 342 burst type 107 external gated mode 107 externa trigger source 118 front panel operation 44 gate polarity 223 225 gated burst 334 gated mode 216 modes available 216 n cycle burst 333 overview 216 starting phase 220 333 trigger delay 333 trigger out signal 114 trigger output 119 trigger source 113 triggered mode 107 216 waveform frequency 109 burst phase degrees vs radians 221 bus interface configuration 135 bus software trigger 213 221 224 bus trigger 117 225 byte order binary block transfers 232 C CALibration COUNt command 265 SECure CODE command 265 STATe command 264 SETup command 264 STRing command 265 VALue command 264 calibration commands 264 error messages 298 message 144 read count 143 reading count 265 sec
116. ameters The PWM deviation width or duty cycle is set to accommodate the current pulse width or duty cycle edge time and period 291 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range duty cycle value clipped to The square wave duty cycle is limited to values between 20 and 80 by instrument hardware Data out of range duty cycle limited by frequency value clipped to upper limit The square wave duty cycle is limited to values between 40 and 60 when the frequency is greater than 10 MHz Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz 292 313 314 315 350 Chapter 5 Error Messages Device Dependent Errors Device Dependent Errors Calibration memory lost memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store the function generator s calibration constants has detected a checksum error This error may be the result of a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields Save recall memory lost memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store instrument states has detected a checksum error This error may be the result of a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields Configuration memory lost memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store the function generator s configuration settings i e remote interface
117. an be reported to the Standard Event summary bit through the enable register To set the enable register mask you must write a decimal value to the register using the ESE command Bit Definitions Standard Event Register Decimal Bit Number Value Definition 0 Operation Complete All commands prior to and including OPC have compieted and the overlapped command e g TRG for burst has completed Not Used Returns O The instrument tried to read the output buffer but it was empty Or a new command line was received before a previous query has been read Or both the input and output buffers are full A seif test cal or other device specific error has occurred see chapter 5 An execution error has occurred see chapter 5 A command syntax error has occurred see chapter 5 Not Used Returns Q Power has been cycled on since the last time the event register was read or cleared Not Used Query Error Device Error Execution Error Command Error Not Used Power On 258 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Standard event register is cleared when e You execute the CLS command e You query the event register using the ESR command The Standard Event enable register is cleared when e You execute the ESE 0 command You turn the power on and have previously configured the function generator to clea
118. ands 147 programming examples 301 programming overview 161 PULSe PERiod command 185 pulse front panel configuration 24 pulse duty cycle definition 188 pulse edge time 73 pulse period 185 function limitations 186 pulse waveform edge time 189 pulse waveforms pulse period 70 tutorial description 318 pulse width 24 71 72 187 definition 185 187 pulse width modulation 93 duty cycle deviation 97 206 modulating frequency 205 modulating source 98 204 modulating waveform 95 modulation waveshape 204 overview 203 pulse waveform 94 width deviation 96 205 PWM 93 commands 204 DE Viation DCYCle command 206 DEViation command 205 duty cycle deviation 97 206 INTernal FREQuency command 205 FUNCtion command 204 modulating frequency 205 moduiating source 98 204 modulating waveform 95 modulation source 98 modulation waveshape 204 overview 203 pulse waveform 94 SOURce command 204 STATe command 207 width deviation 96 205 Q quantization errors 321 questionable data register bit definitions 256 commands 261 operation 256 queue error 129 242 quick reference commands 149 quick start 13 R rack mounting kits 30 radians 220 ramp waveform symmetry 65 181 range hold 179 322 range hold amplitude 66 rear panel connectors 6 overview 6 recalling stored state 239 reference external 248 register diagram status registers 251 registers status 250 remote bus trigger 117 remote errors 129 242 data out of range
119. apter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Amplitude Modulation AM A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform In AM the amplitude of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source For more information on the fundamentals of Amplitude Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select AM Modulation e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow AM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable AM the sweep or burst mode is turned off Front Panel Operation You must enable AM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press and then select AM using the Type softkey The AM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters AM STATe OFF on 14 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Carrier Waveform Shape e AM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform T
120. art frequency 100 stop frequency 100 210 sweep time 212 trigger out signal 105 trigger output 119 trigger source 104 frequency sweeps Syne signal 100 101 FREQuency command 174 frequency shift keying see FSK frequency shift keying See FSK 38 front panel connectors 3 creating arb waveforms 120 display overview 4 number entry 5 overview 3 front panel display enable disable 132 243 number format 133 front panel menu quick reference 33 front panel menu operation 31 front panel selection 18 FSK 89 hop frequency 91 202 carrier frequency 90 front panel operation 38 Index FSK rate 39 91 modulating source 92 201 modulating waveform 90 modulation source 92 overview 200 SOURce command 201 tutorial description 327 FSK rate 39 202 FSKey FREQuency command 202 NTernal FSK rate 202 STATe command 202 FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle command 188 HOLD command 186 TRANsition command 189 WIDTh command 187 RAMP SYMMetry command 181 SYMMetry command 181 SQUare DCYCle command 180 DCYCle command 180 USER command 233 function allowed with modulation 55 amplitude limitations 56 frequency limitations 56 modulation modes allowed 172 pulse period limitations 186 FUNCtion command 172 FUNCtion USER command 234 FUNCtion command 172 G gate burst 334 gate polarity burst 223 225 gated burst 107 gated burst mode 216 gateway address 138 gaussian noise 170 GPIB address 135 connector 6 default address 48 front pa
121. ast 50 characters TDN This command returns a string in the form Agilent Technologies 33220A 0 f ff b bb aa p SCPI Language Version Query The function generator complies with the rules and conventions of the present version of SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments You can determine the SCPI version with which the instrument is in compliance by sending a query from the remote interface You cannot query the SCPI version from the front panel Remote Interface Operation SYSTem VERSion Returns a string in the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year of the version and V represents a version number for that year e g 1999 0 134 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Remote Interface Configuration This section gives information on configuring the function generator for remote interface communication For information on configuring the instrument from the front panel see To Configure the Remote Interface starting on page 48 For information on the SCPI commands available to program the function generator over the remote interface see chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference starting on page 141 The Agilent 33220A supports remote interface communication using a choice of three interfaces GPIB USB and LAN All three interfaces are live at power up This section describes some interface configuration parameters that you may need to set on you
122. ated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed offset will drop in half See Output Termination on page 63 for more information Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts Gnto 50 ohms e You can also set the offset by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV e For de volts the output level is actually controlled by setting the offset voltage You can set the de level to any value between 5 Vde into 50 ohms or 10 Vde into an open circuit To select dc volts from the front panel press and then select the DC On softkey Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset voltage level 3 e Front Panel Operation To set the dc offset press the Offset softkey ie for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired offset To set the offset using a high level and low level press the Offset softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys R
123. ation You must enable burst before setting up any of the other burst parameters Press to output a burst using the present settings for frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable the burst mode after you have set up the other parameters BURSt STATe OFF ON 106 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Type You can use burst in one of two modes as described below The function generator enables one burst mode at a time based on the trigger source and burst source that you select see the table below Triggered Burst Mode In this mode default the function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger You can configure the function generator to use an internal trigger to initiate the burst or you can provide an external trigger by pressing the front panel key applying a trigger signal to the rear panel Trig In connector or sending a software trigger command from the remote interface e External Gated Burst Mode In this mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate
124. ative to zero volts or the de offset value The Sync signal is a TTL low when the output is negative relative to zero volts or the dc offset value For square waveforms the Sync signal is a square waveform with the same duty cycle as the main output The Sync signal is a TTL high when the waveform s output is positive relative to zero volts or the de offset value The Syne signal is a TTL low when the output is negative relative to zero volts or the dc offset value For arbitrary waveforms the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Syne signal is a TTL high when the first downloaded waveform point is output e For internally modulated AM FM PM and PWM the Sync signal is referenced to the modulating waveform not the carrier and is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high during the first half of the modulating waveform For externally modulated AM FM PM and PWM the Sync signal is referenced to the carrier waveform not the modulating waveform and is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle 68 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration For FSK the Sync signal is referenced to the hop frequency The Sync signal is a TTL high on the transition to the hop frequency For frequency sweeps with Marker Off the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high
125. available On the other hand if you select Dty Cyc for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Dty Cyc Dev softkey is available 96 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Duty Cycle Deviation The duty cycle deviation represents the variation in duty cycle of the modulated waveform from the duty cycle of the pulse waveform The duty cycle deviation is expressed as a percentage of the period e Duty cycle deviation 0 to 100 see below The default is 1 e The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wrain Duty Cycle Deviation lt Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle Deviation lt 100 Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100s Wmin 2 ps for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 ps for period gt 1000 s The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time setting Duty Cycle Dev lt Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle Dev lt 100 Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period e Front Panel Operation After enabling PWM press the Dty CyC Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation Remote Interface Operation PWM DEViation DCYCle lt deviation in percent gt MIN MAX Note The pulse width and width deviat
126. aveforms in non volatile memory DATA NVOLatile CATalog List the names of all user defined arbitrary waveforms downloaded to non volatile memory Returns the names of up to four waveforms e A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as shown in the example below If no user defined waveforms are currently downloaded the command returns a null string TESTI ARB TEST2 ARB TEST3 ARB THST4 ARB e Use the DATA DEL command to delete any of the user defined waveforms in non volatile memory enannest DATA NVOLatile FREE Query the number of non volatile memory slots available to store user defined waveforms Returns the number of memory slots available to store user defined waveforms Returns 0 memory is full 1 2 3 or 4 4 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA DELete lt arb name gt Delete the specified arbitrary waveform from memory You can delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output If you attempt to delete this waveform a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated e You cannot delete any of the five built in arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to delete one of these waveforms a Not able to delete a built in arb waveform error is g
127. bulb will normally turn off and the screen will go blank after 8 hours of inactivity For certain applications you may want to disable the bulb saver feature This feature is available from the front panel only The bulb saver setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory the bulb saver mode is enabled Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Sern Svr screen saver softkey from the System menu 130 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Display Contrast To optimize the readability of the front panel display you can adjust the contrast setting This feature is available from the front panel only e Display contrast 15 to 50 The default is 30 The contrast setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Display Contr softkey from the System menu Self Test gt A power on self test occurs automatically when you turn on the function generator This limited test assures you that the function generator is operational e A complete self test runs a series of tests and takes approximately 15 seconds to execute If all tests pass you can have high confidence that the function generator is fully operational e Ifthe complete self test is successful
128. cannot edit any of the five built in arbitrary waveforms Press the Edit Wform softkey to edit any of the arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory or the waveform currently stored in volatile memory While editing an existing waveform please note the following interactions e If you increase the cycle period some points could potentially match existing points The waveform editor will preserve the earliest points and remove all duplicates e If you decrease the cycle period the waveform editor will remove all points that were previously defined beyond the new period e If you increase the voltage limits there will be no change in the voltage levels of any existing points but there may be some loss of vertical resolution Ifyou decrease the voltage limits some of the existing points could potentially exceed the new limits The waveform editor will reduce the voltage levels of such points to equal the new limits e Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape for AM FM PM or PWM the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 125 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations System Related Operations This section gives information on topics such as instrument state storage power down recall error conditions self test and front panel display control This information is not directly related to waveform generation b
129. ch information as the date when the last calibration was performed the date when the next calibration is due the function generator s serial number or the name and phone number of the person to contact for a new calibration You can record a calibration message only from the remote interface and only when the function generator is unsecured You can read the message from either the front panel or over the remote interface You can read the calibration message whether the function generator is secured or unsecured The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters additional characters are truncated Storing a calibration message will overwrite any message previously stored in memory e The calibration message is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Cal Info softkey from the Test Cal menu The calibration message is listed as one of the messages on the display e Remote Interface Operation To store the calibration message send the following command including any desired string within the single quotes CAL STR Cal Due 01 August 2003 1 4 A i esate Chapter 3 Features and Functions Factory Default Settings Factory Default Settings The table on the following page summarizes the factory default settings for the Agilent 33220A For your convenience this table is du
130. ch storage location Recall stored instrument states Restore all instrument settings to their factory default values e Select the instrument s power on configuration last or factory default Configure system related parameters Generate a dc only voltage level Enable disable the Sync signal which is output from the Sync connector Select the output termination 1Q to 10 KQ or Infinite Enable disable amplitude autoranging Select the waveform polarity normal or inverted Select the GPIB address Specify the LAN configuration IP address and network configuration Select how periods and commas are used in numbers displayed on the front panel Select the local language for front panel messages and help text Enable disable the tone heard when an error is generated Enable disable the display bulb saver mode Adjust the contrast setting of the front panel display Perform an instrument self test Secure unsecure the instrument for calibration and perform manual calibrations Query the instrument s firmware revision codes View the list of Help topics 3 View the last message displayed View the remote command error queue Get HELP on any key How to generate a dc only voltage level How to generate a modulated waveform How to create an arbitrary waveform How to reset the instrument to its default state How to view a waveform i
131. ct the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command o 109 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Count The burst count defines the number of cycles to be output per burst Used in the triggered burst mode only internal or external source Burst count 1 to 50 000 cycles in 1 cycle increments You can also select an infinite burst count The default is 1 cycle When the Internal trigger source is selected the specified number of cycles is output continuously at a rate determined by the burst period setting The burst period defines the interval between bursts When the Internal trigger source is selected the burst count must be less than the product of the burst period and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Burst Period X Waveform Frequency The function generator will automatically increase the burst period up to its maximum value to accommodate the specified burst count but the waveform frequency will not be changed When the gated burst mode is selected the burst count is ignored However if you change the burst count from the remote interface while in the gated mode the function generator remembers the new count and will use it when the triggered mode is selected Front Panel Operation To set the burst count press the Cycles softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the count To select an infinite count burst instead press the Cycles
132. ction generator varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion during the sweep SWEep TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum SWEep TIME MINimum MAXimum Set the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency Select from 1 ms to 500 seconds The default is 1 second MIN 1 ms MAX 500 seconds The TIME query returns the sweep time in seconds e The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time that you select SWEep STATe OFF oN SWEep STATe Disable or enable the sweep mode To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other sweep parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off 212 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal Bus TRIGger SOURCE Select the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger The function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Trig In connector or a software bus trigger The default is IMM The SOUR query returns IMM EXT or
133. cy boundaries using one of two methods a Start Frequency Stop Frequency Use the FREQ STAR command to set the start frequency and the FREQ STOP command to set the stop frequency To sweep up in frequency set the start frequency lt stop frequency To sweep down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency b Center Frequency Frequency Span Use the FREQ CENT command to set the center frequency and the FREQ SPAN command to set the frequency span To sweep up in frequency set a positive span To sweep down in frequency set a negative span Select the sweep mode Use the SWE SPAC command to select linear or logarithmic spacing for the sweep 208 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands 4 Set the sweep time Use the SWE TIME command to set the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency 5 Select the sweep trigger source Use the TRIG SOUR command to select the source from which the sweep will be triggered 6 Set the marker frequency Optional If desired you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep Use the MARK FREQ command to set the marker frequency to any value between the start frequency and stop frequency Use the MARK ON command to enable the frequency marker 7 Enable the sweep mode After you have set up the other sweep parameters use the SWE STAT ON c
134. d Used in the triggered burst mode only Enable the burst mode After you have set up the other burst parameters use the BURS STAT ON command to enable the burst mode 217 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands Burst Mode Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the waveform For internally triggered bursts the minimum frequency is 2 mHz For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count BURSt MODE TRIGgered GATed BURSt MODE Select the burst mode In the triggered mode the function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received from the specified trigger source TRIG SOUR command In the gated mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The default is TRIG The MODE query returns TRIG or GAT When the gated mode is selected the waveform generator either runs or stops based on the logic level of the gate signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector You can select the polarity of the Trig In connector using the BURS GATE POL command see page 223 When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform c
135. d frequency must be appropriate for the function For example the command APPL RAMP 20 MHz results in a Data out of range error The frequency is set to 200 kHz which is the maximum for a ramp waveform 164 o Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command Output Amplitude For the amplitude parameter of the APPLy command the output amplitude range depends on the function specified and the output termination You can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEFault in place of a specific value for the amplitude parameter MIN selects the smallest amplitude 1 mVpp into 50 ohms MAX selects the largest amplitude for the function specified at most 10 Vpp into 50 ohms depending on function and offset voltage The default amplitude is 100 mVpp into 50 ohms for all functions Limits Due to Output Termination The output amplitude limits are determined by the current output termination setting the APPLy command does not change the termination setting For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 20 Vpp and no error will be generated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half See the OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information e You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms
136. d and do not include units with the APPLy or VOLT command the value specified for the amplitude parameter in the APPLy command will be in Vrms 184 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands Pulse Configuration Commands See also Pulse Waveforms starting on page 70 in chapter 3 This section describes the low level commands used to program the function generator to output a pulse waveform To select the pulse function use the FUNC PULS command see page 172 Refer to the diagram below for the command descriptions that follow heen ell 3 g Rise Time Fall Time PELET EEE EET PALE AEI OTT OR Pariod a A eg aa T a cel E AA gt PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PULSe PERiod MINimum MAXimum Set the period for pulses Select a period from 200 ns to 2000 seconds The default is 1 ms MIN 200 ns MAX 2000 seconds The PULS PER query returns the period of the pulse waveform in seconds The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the edge time The function generator will adjust the edge time and the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated The edge time is minimized first and then the width or duty cycle is adjusted as shown below Period gt Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time or in terms of pulse duty cycle Period gt Period X
137. description 318 SRQ 254 standard event register bit definitions 258 commands 262 operation 258 start frequency sweep 210 starting phase burst 112 starting phase burst 220 state storage 126 238 front panel operation 47 naming 127 naming from front panel 47 naming location 240 power down recall 126 STATus PRESet command 263 QUEStionable CON Dition command 261 ENABle command 261 QUEStionable command 261 status byte register bit definitions 252 commands 260 operation 252 status registers 250 condition register 250 enable register 250 event register 250 questionable data register 256 register diagram 251 standard event register 258 status byte register 252 status system 250 stop frequency sweep 210 stored state recall power down state 241 stored states 126 238 default names 240 deleting from memory 240 front panel operation 47 naming 127 naming from front panei 47 power down recall 126 349 strings error 273 subnet mask 137 support technical 7 swapped byte order 232 SWEep SPACing command 212 STATe command 212 TIME command 212 sweep 99 332 center frequency 101 211 external trigger source 118 frequency span 101 211 front panel operation 40 42 linear vs logarithmic 102 332 linear vs logarithmic spacing 212 marker frequency 103 215 overview 208 spacing 102 start frequency 100 210 stop frequency 100 210 sweep time 102 212 trigger out signal 105 trigger output 119 trigger source 104
138. deviation commands are converted to width deviation values e DCYCle The function generator holds the pulse duty cycle setting in percent constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a pulse width value is received the width is converted to the equivalent duty cycle in percent If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse duty cycle is held and the duty cycle deviation also is held as the period is varied Width deviation commands are converted to duty cycle deviation values Note The FUNC PULS HOLD command does not limit period settings The pulse width or duty cycle are adjusted if necessary to accommodate a new period setting This command will cause the Width Dty Cyc softkey in the pulse menu to toggle its sense when appropriate Also changing the Width Dty Cyc softkey from the front panel will change the HOLD selection for subsequent programmatic behavior 186 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands FUNCtion PULSe WIDTh lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe WIDTh MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse width in seconds The pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge You can vary the pulse width from 20 ns to 2000 seconds see restrictions below The default pulse width is 100 us MIN 20 ns MAX 1999 99 seconds The WIDT query
139. dge time as shown below The function generator will adjust the pulse width and edge time as needed to accommodate the specified period Period gt Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time e Front Panel Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period Remote Interface Operation PULSE PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 10 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Pulse Width The pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge e Pulse width 20 ns to 2000 s see restrictions below The default pulse width is 100 ps The minimum pulse width Wmin is affected by the period Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s one Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 ps for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 ps for period gt 1000 s The specified pulse width must also be less than the difference between the period and the minimum pulse width as shown below The function generator will adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period Pulse Width lt Period Wmin gt The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the period and the edge time as shown below The function generator will automatically adjust the pulse width as
140. dulation After you have set up the other modulation parameters use the FM STAT ON command to enable FM 193 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands FM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform FM SOURce INTernal ExXTernal FM SOURCe Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external moduiation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The frequency deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz using the FM DEV command then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected FM SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP
141. e Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 ps for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 ps for period gt 1000 s 206 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time setting Duty Cycle Dev lt Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle Dev lt 100 Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period If you select the External modulating source PWM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the duty cycle deviation to 5 percent a 5V signal level corresponds to a 5 percent deviation that is an additional 5 of period added to the pulse duty cycle Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the duty cycle Note The operation of the PWM DEV DCYC command is affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command see Pulse Configuration Commands on page 185 for further information The FUNC PULS HOLD command determines whether pulse width the default or pulse duty cycle values are to be held constant as the period ts varied If the width is held so ts the width deviation If the duty cycle ts held so is the duty cycle deviation If pulse width and width deviation are being held duty cycle deviation values specified with
142. e registers which control the action of specific bits within the register group What is a Condition Register A condition register continuously monitors the state of the instrument The bits in the condition register are updated in real time and the bits are not latched or buffered This is a read only register and bits are not cleared when you read the register A query of a condition register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in that register What is an Event Register An event register latches the various events from changes in the condition register There is no buffering in this register while an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored This is a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by query command such as STAT QUES EVEN or a CLS clear status command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in that register What is an Enable Register An enable register defines which bits in the event register will be reported to the Status Byte register group You can write to or read from an enable register A CLS clear status command will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register A STAT PRES command clears all bits in the enable register To enable bits in the enable register to be reported to the Status Byte r
143. e remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described Ifyou select the External modulating source FM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the frequency deviation to 100 kHz then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency FM STATe OFF ON FM STATe Disable or enable FM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FM and AM at the same time When you enable FM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow FM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FM the sweep or burst mode is turned off 196 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Modulation PM Commands Phase Modulation PM Commands See also Phase Modulation in chapter 3 PM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a PM waveform The commands used for PM are listed
144. e the function generator has decreased the pulse duty cycle to accommodate the specified period the edge time is already at its minimum setting 221 Settings conflict edge time decreased due to period For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust oe the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the edge time to accommodate the specified period and preserve the pulse width setting 221 Settings conflict pulse width increased due to large period For a pulse waveform the minimum pulse width is 20 ns for periods up to 10 seconds For periods above 10 seconds the minimum pulse width is greater The function generator has adjusted the pulse width to the new minimum determined by the current period See Pulse Configuration Commands in chapter 4 for further information 283 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict edge time decreased due to pulse width For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the edge time to accommodate the specified pulse width Edge Time lt
145. e NOISe USER FUNCtion PWM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation lt deviation in seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation DCYCle lt deviation in percent gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation DCYCle MINimum MAXimum PWM SOURce INTernal ExTernal PWM SOURce PWM STATe OFF ON PWM STATe Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 153 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Sweep Commands see page 210 for more information FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STARtC MINimum MAXimum STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STOP MINimum MAXimum FREQuency CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum CENTer MINimum MAXimum SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum SPAN MINimum MAXimum SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SPACing i TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum TIME MINimum MAXimum SWEep STATe OFF ON SWEep STATe TRIiGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIiGger SOURcCe TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig In Connector TRIGger SLOPe OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector sTRIGger SLOPe TRIGger OFF ON TRIiGger MARKer FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum MARKER FREQuency MINimum MAXimum MARKer OFF ON MARKer Para
146. e bits you wish to enable in the register The ENAB query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the STAT QUES ENAB command 261 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Standard Event Register Commands See the table on page 258 for the register bit definitions ESR Query the Standard Event Status Register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by a CLS clear status command or queried by this command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESE lt enable value gt ESE Enable bits in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in the Status Byte The selected bits are summarized in the Standard Event bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register The ESE query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the ESE command e A CLS clear status does not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register e A STATus PRESet does not clear the bits in the Status Byte enable register A PSC O preserves the contents of the enable register through power cycles 262 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Miscellaneous Status Register Commands CLS Clear the event register in all register groups This command also clears t
147. e front panel However note that location 0 is automatically overwritten when power is cycled the instrument state previously stored will be overwritten The state storage feature remembers the selected function including arbitrary waveforms frequency amplitude dc offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the function generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform 238 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands When power is turned off the function generator automatically stores its state in storage location 0 You can configure the function generator to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored See the MEM STAT REC AUTO command on page 241 for more information The front panel display state DISP command is saved when you store the instrument state When you recall the instrument state the front panel display will return to the previous state An instrument reset RST command does not affect the configurations stored in memory Once a state is stored it remains until it is overwritten or specifically deleted RCL 0 1 2 3 4 Recall the instrument state stored in the specified non
148. e function generator outputs a burst with the specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger At power on the internally triggered burst mode is enabled Burst trigger source Internal External or Manual The default is Internal When the Internal immediate source is selected the frequency at which the burst is generated is determined by the burst period e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator outputs the specified number of cycles each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified polarity External trigger signals that occur during a burst are ignored When the Manual source is selected the function generator outputs one burst each time the front panel key is pressed When the External or Manual trigger source is selected the burst count and burst phase remain in effect but the burst period is ignored e Front Panel Operation Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey To specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the signal on the Trig In connector press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey 113 Cha
149. e function generator wiil automatically adjust the output frequency to 200 kHz the upper limit for ramps From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the frequency will be adjusted as described Amplitude Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum amplitude is less than that of the current function the amplitude is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new function This may occur when the output units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine in Vrms From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described 173 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands PREQuency lt requency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the output frequency MIN selects the lowest frequency allowed for the selected function and MAX selects the highest frequency allowed The default is 1 kHz for all functions The FREQ query returns the frequency setting in hertz for the function currently selected Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 Hz 20 MHz Square 1 Hz 20 MHz Ramp 1 u Hz 200
150. e modulation depth is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude e Front Panel Operation After enabling AM press the AM Depth softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the depth Remote Interface Operation AM DEPTh lt depth in percent gt MINimum MAXimum 77 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for AM Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal gt Ifyou select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude Modulation in anne anana o Front Panel Operation After enabling AM press the Source softkey Remote Interface Operation AM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 78 Chapter 3
151. e quote delimiter as part of the string by typing it twice without any characters in between The following command uses a string parameter DISPlay TEXT lt quoted string gt 270 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using Device Clear Using Device Clear Device Clear is an IEEE 488 low level bus message that you can use to return the function generator to a responsive state Different programming languages and IEEE 488 interface cards provide access to this capability through their own unique commands The status registers the error queue and all configuration states are left unchanged when a Device Clear message is received Device Clear performs the following actions e The function generator s input and output buffers are cleared The function generator is prepared to accept a new command string e An overlapped command if any will be terminated with no Operation Complete indication applies to the TRG command Any sweep or burst in progress will be aborted immediately 271 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using Device Clear 212 sheen ceed EA I APSE E T Dee eet eee eleda Error Messages 112 113 123 124 128 431 138 148 151 Chapter 5 Error Messages M Command Errors n Program mnemonic too long A command header was received which contained mor
152. e than the maximum 12 characters allowed This error is also reported when a character type parameter is too long Example OUTP SYNCHRONIZATION ON Undefined header A command was received that is not valid for this instrument You may have misspelled the command or it may not be a valid command If you are using the short form of the command make sure that it is correctly abbreviated Example TRIGG SOUR BUS Exponent too large A numeric parameter was found whose exponent was larger than 32 759 Example BURS NCYCL 1834000 Too many digits A numeric parameter was found whose mantissa contained more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros Numeric data not allowed A numeric parameter was received but a character string was expected Example DISP TEXT 123 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter You may have misspelled the suffix Example SWE TIME 0 5 SECS Suffix not allowed A suffix is not supported for this command Example BURS NCYC 12 CYC Character data not allowed A discrete parameter was received but a character string or numeric parameter was expected Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid parameter type Example DISP TEXT ON Invalid string data An invalid character string was received Check to see if you have enclosed the character string in quotation marks and verify that the string contains valid ASCII characters Example DISP TEXT TESTING
153. e waveform capabilities with adjustable edge time LCD display provides numeric and graphical views Easy to use knob and numeric keypad Instrument state storage with user defined names Portable ruggedized case with non skid feet Flexible system features Four downloadable 64K point arbitrary waveform memories GPIB EEE 488 USB and LAN remote interfaces are standard SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments compatibility Note Unless otherwise indicated this manual applies to all Serial Numbers The Front Panel at a Glance 7 00 000 0 kHz Period ifiLevel LoLev as ary A i oae i E 1 Graph Mode Local Key 9 Manual Trigger Key used for 2 On Off Switch Sweep and Burst only 3 Modulation Sweep Burst Keys 10 Output Enable Disable Key 4 State Storage Menu Key 11 Knob 5 Utility Menu Key 12 Cursor Keys 6 Help Menu Key 13 Sync Connector 7 Menu Operation Softkeys 14 Output Connector 8 Waveform Selection Keys Note To get context sensitive help on any front panel key or menu softkey press and hold down that key The Front Panel Display at a Glance Mode Trigger Output information Information Units Status Cycle Burst Internal Trigger i Disp Ser 10 000ms Wi KA Cycles Start j i i Trigger Gated Infinite Phase Period Setup pe Softkey Labels Graph Mode To enter or exit the Graph Mode press the Grap key Parameter Parameter Name Value Frequenc
154. e you can perform a calibration you must unsecure the function generator by entering the correct security code lf you forget your security code you can disable the security feature by means of two CAL ENABLE pads on the main PC board inside the instrument See the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information e The security code is set to AT383220A when the function generator is shipped from the factory The security code is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset The security code may contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or an underscore _ You do not have to use all 12 characters but the first character must always be a letter 141 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview To Unsecure for Calibration You can unsecure the function generator either from the front panel or over the remote interface The function generator is secured when shipped from the factory and the security code is set to AT33220A Once you enter a security code that code must be used for both front panel and remote operation For example if you secure the function generator from the front panel you must use that same code to unsecure it from the remote interface Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Secure Off softkey
155. e your computer to respond to the IMEE 488 service request SRQ interrupt to use this capability Use the Status Byte enable register SRE command to select which condition bits will assert the IEREE 488 SRQ line If bit 6 RQS transitions from a 0 to a I then an IEEE 488 service request message is sent to your computer The computer may then poll the instruments on the interface bus to identify which one is asserting the service request line that is the instrument with bit 6 set in its Serial Poll response When a Serial Poll is issued bit 6 RQS is cleared in the Serial Poll response no other bits are affected and the service request line is cleared The Master Summary Bit in the STB response is not cleared To obtain the Serial Poll response send an IEEE 488 Serial Poll message The instrument sends a one byte binary response Performing a Serial Poll is handled automatically by the IEEE 488 bus interface hardware Unlike ASCH commands and some other GPIB commands a Serial Poll is executed immediately and does not involve the instrument s main processor Therefore the status indicated by a Serial Poll may not necessarily indicate the effect of the most recent command Use the OPC command to guarantee that commands previously sent to the instrument have completed before executing a Serial Poll Using STB to Read the Status Byte The STB command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is process
156. ed edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey Remote Interface Operation OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON 114 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering Triggering Applies to sweep and burst only You can issue triggers for sweeps or bursts using internal triggering external triggering or manual triggering e Internal or automatic triggering is enabled when you turn on the function generator In this mode the function generator outputs continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected e External triggering uses the rear panel Trig In connector to control the sweep or burst The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse You can select whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the external trigger signal e Manual triggering initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time you press from the front panel Continue pressing this key to re trigger the function generator e The key is disabled when in remote and when a function other than burst or sweep is currently selected Trigger Source Choices Applies to sweep and burst only You must specify the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger e Sweep trigger source Internal External or Manual The default is Internal The function generator will accept a manual trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Tri
157. ed i Offset No Offset Voltage With Offset Voltage When a waveform is inverted the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted e Front Panel Operation Press and select the Output Setup softkey Then press the Normal softkey again to toggle between the Normal and Invert selections Remote Interface Operation QUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted 67 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Sync Output Signal A sync output is provided on the front panel Sync connector All of the standard output functions except de and noise have an associated Sync signal For certain applications where you may not want to output the Sync signal you can disable the Syne connector By default the Sync signal is routed to the Syne connector enabled When the Sync signal is disabled the output level on the Sync connector is at a logic low level When a waveform is inverted see Waveform Polarity on the previous page the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted e The Sync signal setting is overridden by the setting of the marker used with the sweep mode see page 103 Therefore when the marker is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the Sync signal setting is ignored For sine ramp and pulse waveforms the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high when the waveform s output is positive rel
158. ed like any other ASCII instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a Serial Poll but bit 6 is not cleared as long as the enabled conditions remain The STB command is not handled automatically by the IHEE 488 bus interface hardware and will be executed only after previous commands have completed You cannot clear an SRQ using the STB command 204 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System Using the Message Available Bit MAV You can use the Status Byte Message Available bit bit 4 to determine when data is available to read into your computer The instrument subsequently clears bit 4 only after all messages have been read from the output buffer To Interrupt Your Computer Using SRQ i 4 5 Send a Device Clear message to return the function generator to a responsive state and clear it s output buffer e g CLEAR 710 Clear the event registers and error queue using the CLS command Set up the enable register masks Use the ESE command to configure the Standard Event enable register and the SRE command to configure the Status Byte enable register Send the OPC command and read the result to ensure synchronization Enable your computer s IEEE 488 SRQ interrupt To Determine When a Command Sequence is Completed I Send a Device Clear message to return the function generator to a responsive state and clear it s output buffer e g CLEAR 710 Clea
159. eep each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified polarity The trigger period must be greater than or equal to the specified sweep time plus 1 ms e When the Manual source is selected the function generator outputs one sweep each time the front panel key is pressed e Front Panel Operation Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey To specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the Trig In connector press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey e Remote Interface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS Use the following command to specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the signal on the Trig In connector TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative See Triggering on page 115 for more information 104 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Trigger Out Signal A trigger out signal is provided on the rear panel Trig Out connector used with sweep and burst only When enabled a TT L compatibie square waveform with either a rising edge default or falling edge is output from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep When the Internal immediate trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of
160. egister you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the corresponding bits 250 7 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System Agilent 33220A Status System Questionable Data Register NOTES C Condition Register EV Event Register EN Enable Register Ovid Overload Ay 3 O E lt D E STAT QUES EVENt STAT QUES ENABL lt value gt STAT QUES ENABLe Output Buffer i E Status Byte Register PO cease ize Serial STB SRE mann Summary Bit RQS EV EN Operation Complete ES Query Error 2 lt a gt Device Error e teediecmtennas add 291 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Status Byte Register The Status Byte summary register reports conditions from the other status registers Data that is waiting in the function generator s output buffer is immediately reported on the Message Available bit bit 4 Clearing an event register from one of the other register groups will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte condition register Reading all messages from the output buffer including any pending queries will clear the Message Available bit To set the enable register mask and generate an SRQ service request you must write a decimal value to the register using the SRE command Bit Definitions Status Byte Register Decimal Bit Numbe
161. el e When a waveform is inverted OUTP POL command the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted The OUTP SYNC command is overridden by the setting of the MARK command used with the sweep mode see page 215 Therefore when the marker frequency is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the OUTP SYNC command is ignored 183 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands VOLTage UNIT VPP VRMS DBM VOLTPage UNIT Select the units for output amplitude does not affect offset voltage or high low levels The default is VPP The UNIT query returns VPP VRMS or DBM The function generator uses the current units selection for both front panel and remote interface operations For example if you select VRMS from the remote interface using the VOLT UNIT command the units are displayed as VRMS on the front panel e The VOLT query command see page 175 returns the output amplitude in the units set by the most recent VOLT UNIT command i The output units for amplitude cannot be set to dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp See the OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information e Unless you specify the units as part of the APPLy or VOLT command the VOLT UNIT command takes precedence For example if you select Vrms using the VOLT UNIT comman
162. emote Interface Operation VOLTage OFFSet lt offset gt MINimum MAXimum Or you can set the offset by specifying a high level and low level using the following commands VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLY command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command B p7 61 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Units Applies to output amplitude only At power on the units for output amplitude are volts peak to peak 62 Output units Vpp Vrms or dBm The default is Vpp The unit setting is stored in volatile memory The units are set to Vpp when power has been off or after a remote interface reset provided the Power On state is set to default The function generator uses the current units selection for both front panel and remote interface operations For example if you select VRMS from the remote interface the units are displayed as VRMS on the front panel The output units for amplitude cannot be set to dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp Front Panel Operation Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired magnitude and then press the appropriate softkey to select the units You can also convert from one unit to another from the front panel For example to conv
163. ency above 1 MHz more attenuation will occur At approximately 2 5 MHz waveform distortion due to aliasing will become evident Some aliasing will be present in most arbitrary waveforms but whether or not it will be troublesome depends on your specific application When creating arbitrary waveforms the function generator will always attempt to replicate the finite length time record to produce a periodic version of the data in waveform memory However as shown below it is possible that the shape and phase of a signal may be such that a discontinuity is introduced at the end point When the waveshape is repeated for all time this end point discontinuity will introduce leakage errors in the frequency domain because many spectral terms are required to describe the discontinuity Leakage error is caused when the waveform record does not include an integral number of cycles of the fundamental frequency Power from the fundamental frequency and its harmonics is transferred to the spectral components of the rectangular sampling function You can reduce leakage errors by adjusting the window length to include an integer number of cycles or by including more cycles within the window to reduce the residual end point discontinuity size Some signals are composed of discrete non harmonically related frequencies Since these signals are non repetitive all frequency components cannot be harmonically related to the window length You should be careful i
164. ency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 90 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation FSK Hop Frequency The maximum alternate or hop frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 100 Hz for all functions Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine Square Ramp Arbs e The internal modulating waveform is a square wave with a 50 duty cycle When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output e Front Panel Operation To set the hop frequency press the Hop Freq softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface Operation FSKey FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FSK Rate The FSK rate is the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and the hop frequency when you select the internal FSK source FSK rate internal source 2 mHz to 100 kHz The default is 10 Hz The FSK rate is ignored when the external FSK source is selected Front Panel Operation To set the FSK rate press the FSK Rate softkey Then use the knob or numeric keyp
165. enerated e Use the DATA DEL ALL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory and all user defined non volatile waveforms all at once If one of the waveforms is currently being output a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated DATA DELete ALI Delete all user defined arbitrary waveforms from memory This command deletes the waveform in volatile memory and all user defined waveforms in non volatile memory The five built in waveforms in non volatile memory are not deleted The colon before the ALL parameter is required DATA DELete ALL If you insert a space instead of a colon the function generator will attempt to delete an arbitrary waveform with the name ALL If no such waveform is stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated Usethe DATA DEL lt arb name gt command to delete stored waveforms one at a time e You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output If you attempt to delete this waveform a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated e You cannot delete any of the five built in arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to delete one of these waveforms a Not able to delete a built in arb waveform error is generated 236 TETTE Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA ATTRibute AVERage lt arb name gt
166. enerator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period Duty Cycle gt 100 X 1 6 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 1 6 X Edge Time Period Front Panel Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Dty Cyc softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired duty cycle e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum 72 a Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Edge Time The edge time sets each edge transition time rising and falling of the pulse The rise time and fall time cannot be set independently each is equal to the edge time For each transition the edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold e Edge time 5 ns to 100 ns see restrictions below The default edge time is 5 ns The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as shown below The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse width Edge Time lt 0 625 X Pulse Width or in terms of duty cycle Edge Time lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 e Front Panel Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Edge Time softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired edge time e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion PULSe TRANsition lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 13 Ch
167. ent register e A STATus PRESet does not clear the bits in the Status Byte enable register A PSC 0 preserves the contents of the enable register through power cycles 260 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Questionable Data Register Commands See the table on page 256 for the register bit definitions STATus QUEStionable CONDition Query the condition register in this group This is a read only register and bits are not cleared when you read the register A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Query the event register in this register group This is a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by this command or CLS clear status command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt enable value gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle Enable bits in the enable register in this register group The selected bits are then reported to the Status Byte A CLS clear status will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register The STATus PRESet command clears all bits in the enable register To enable bits in the enable register you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of th
168. er enabling FM press the FM Freq softkey e Remote Interface Operation FM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 82 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Deviation The frequency deviation setting represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency Frequency deviation 1 Hz to 10 05 MHz limited to 150 kHz for ramps and 3 05 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz e The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the function generator will limit the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present 2 carrier frequency e The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 6 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to set the deviation to a value that is not valid the function generator will limit it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Front Panel Operation After enabling FM press the Freq Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation Remote Interface Operation FM DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum 83 Chapter 3 Features and Function
169. ered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep or burst e When the Bus software trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR BUS command the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 ps pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst OUTPut TRIGger OFF oN OUTPut TRIGger Disable or enable the trigger out signal used for sweep and burst only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge OUTP TRIG SLOP command is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst The default is OFF The TRIG query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 226 seest Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands Arbitrary Waveform Commands See also Arbitrary Waveforms starting on page 120 in chapter 3 Arbitrary Waveform Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to download and output an arbitrary waveform over the remote interface The commands used for arbitrary waveforms are listed on page 229 Refer to chapter 7 Tutorial for more information on the internal operation of downloading and outputting an arbitrary waveform Chapter 6 Application Programs contains example programs which show the use of arbitrary waveforms You may find it useful to refer to the programs after reading the following section in this chapter Download the waveform points into volati
170. eriod of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time SWE TIME command e When the External trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered sweep uses the same connector to trigger the sweep e When the Bus software trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR BUS command the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 ps pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON OUTPut TRIGger Disable or enable the trigger out signal When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge OUTP TRIG SLOP command is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep The default is OFF The TRIG query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 214 Chapter 4 Remoie Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands MARKer FREQuency lt requency gt MINimum MAXimum MARKer FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the marker frequency This is the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep The Sync signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep Select from 1 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 500 Hz MIN the start or stop freq
171. ert 2 Vpp to its equivalent value in Vrms press and then press the Vays softkey The converted value is 707 1 mVrms for a sine wave Remote Interface Operation VOLTage UNIT VPP VRMS DBM Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Termination Applies to output amplitude and offset voltage only The Agilent 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 chms to the front panel Output connector If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect Output termination 1Q to 10 kQ or Infinite The default is 50Q The message line at the top of the display calls attention to eet termination settings other than 500 The output termination setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default e Ifyou specify a 50 ohm termination but are actually terminating into an open circuit the actual output will be twice the value specified For example if you set the offset to 100 mVde and specify a 50 ohm load but are terminating the output into an open circuit the actual offset will be 200 mVdc e If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude and offset levels are automatically adjusted no error will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the outp
172. es a waveform with amplitude modulation using lower level SCPI commands It also shows how to use the SAV command to store the instrument configuration in the function generator s internal memory Private Sub cmdAMLowLevels_ Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI04388 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib FormattedIO0488 Set Fgen IO io_mgr Open txtI0O Text On Error GoTo Myirror This program uses low level SCPI commands to configure the function gnerator to output an AM waveform This program also shows how to use state storage to store the instrument configuration in memory With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Cl ear Clear errors and status registers WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Output termination is 50 Ohms WriteString FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid Carrier shape is sine WriteString FREQuency 5000 VOLTage 5 Carrier freq is 5 kHz 5 Vpp WriteString AM INTernal FUNCtion SiNusoid Modulating shape is sine WriteString AM INTernal FREQuency 200 Modulation freq 200 Hz WriteString AM DEPTh 80 Modulation depth 80 WriteString AM STATe ON Turn AM modulation on WriteString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output WriteString SAV 1 Store state in memory location 1 Use the RCL 1 command to recall the stored state End With Exit Sub a MYErroOr txtE
173. es one burst mode at a time o Triggered Burst Mode In this mode default the function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger You can configure the function generator to use an internal trigger to mitiate the burst or you can provide an external trigger by pressing the front panel key by applying a trigger signal to the rear panel Trig In connector or by sending a software trigger command from the remote interface External Gated Burst Mode In this mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform Burst Mode Bursi Count Burst Period Burst Phase Trigger Source BURS MODE BURS NCYC BURS INT PER BURS PHAS TRIG SOUR Triggered Burst Mode interna Trigger TRIGgered Available Available Available iMMediate Triggered Burst Mode s External Trigger TRiGgered Available Not Used Availabie EXTernal BUS Gated Burst Mode External Trigger GATed No
174. et the offset by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an associated offset voltage of 500 mV See the VOLT HIGH and VOLT LOW commands below for more information To output a de voltage level select the de voltage function using the FUNC DC command and then set the offset voltage level using the VOLT OFFS command You can set the de level to any value between 5 Vde into 50 ohms or 10 Vde into an open circuit VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum HIGH MINimum MAXimum LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAX imum LOW MINimum MAXimum Set the high or low voltage levels For all functions the default high level is 50 mV and the default low level is 50 mV MIN selects the most negative voltage level for the selected function and MAX selects the largest voltage level The HIGH and LOW queries return the high and low levels respectively Limits Due to Amplitude You can set the voltage levels to a positive or negative value with the restrictions shown below Vpp is the maximum peak to peak amplitude for the selected output termination 10 Vpp for a 50 ohm load or 20 Vpp for a high impedance load Vhigh Vlow lt Vpp max and Vhigh Vlow lt Yep max If the specified level is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum voltage allowed From
175. ey and then set the pulse period to 500 ms 509 00ms AN Freq EES ME Edge Period il Me a el BOS Bas a T Set the pulse width Press the Width softkey and then set the pulse width to 10 ms The pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge note the display icon 10 000 00ms HiLevel LoLevellDty cy Set the edge time for both edges Press the Edge Time softkey and then set the edge time for both the rising and falling edges to 50 ns The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold of each edge note the display icon Emi mE ME Feige Period Sa evel Lalesvei Dty Cvct Time Chapter 1 Quick Start To View a Waveform Graph To View a Waveform Graph In the Graph Mode you can view a graphical representation of the current waveform parameters The softkeys are listed in the same order as in the normal display mode and they perform the same functions However only one label for example Freq or Period is displayed for each softkey at one time Enable the Graph Mode Press the key to enable the Graph Mode The name of the currently selected parameter shown in the upper left corner of the display and the parameter s numeric value field are both highlighted Edge Timed fee 500 Tie an 1500 Y 500mY CEMR Jam JGR DOMS Period HiLevel Lolevel rm Width ERE Select the desired parameter To
176. eys Press to output the arbitrary waveform currently selected To view the other arbitrary waveform choices press the Select Wform softkey To select de volts from the front panel press and then select the DC On softkey Press the Offset softkey to enter the desired offset voltage level Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Frequency As shown below the output frequency range depends on the function currently selected The default frequency ts I kHz for all functions Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 Hz 20 MHz Square 1 uHz 20 MHz Ramp t Hz 200 kHz Puise 500 uHz 5 MHz Noise DC Not Applicable Not Applicable Arbs 1 Hz 6 MHz e Function Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum frequency is less than that of the current function the frequency is adjusted to the maximum value for the new function For example if you are currently outputting a 20 MHz sine wave and then change to the ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the output frequency to 200 kHz the upper limit for ramps Burst Limitation For internally triggered bursts the minimum frequency is 2 mHz For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed
177. f The function generator cannot generate a modulated waveform using the de voltage function The selected modulation mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to sweep dc sweep turned off The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the de voltage function The sweep mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to burst dc burst turned off The function generator cannot generate a burst using the dc voltage function The burst mode has been turned off 282 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors 221 Settings conflict not able to sweep noise sweep turned off The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the noise function The sweep mode has been turned off 221 Settings conflict pulse width decreased due to period For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the pulse width to accommodate the specified period the edge time is already at its minimum setting 221 Settings conflict pulse duty cycle decreased due to period For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this cas
178. frequency is used if the present value is valid for the new function To set the waveform period instead press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey the current selection is highlighted 1 00 000 00 kHz y tv eriod HiLevel LoLevel Enter the magnitude of the desired frequency Using the numeric keypad enter the value 1 2 Select the units by pressing a key below 1 2 iM MHZ GAEL Select the desired untts Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the function generator outputs a waveform with the displayed frequency if the output is enabled For this example press MHz 7 800 000 00MHz MM qr Freg gi Ane Pasian HiLevel Lolevel Note You can also enter the desired value using the knob and cursor keys 17 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Output Amplitude To Set the Output Amplitude At power on the function generator outputs a sine wave with an amplitude of 100 mV peak to peak nto a 50Q termination The following steps show you how to change the amplitude to 50 mVrms Press the Amp softkey The displayed amplitude is either the power on value or the amplitude previously selected When you change functions the same amplitude is used if the present value is valid for the new function To set the amplitude using a high level and low level press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and LoLevel softke
179. from the Test Cal menu Remote Interface Operation To unsecure the function generator send the following command with the correct security code CAL SECURE STATE OFF AT33220A To Secure Against Calibration You can secure the function generator either from the front panel or over the remote interface The function generator is secured when shipped from the factory and the security code is set to AT33220A e Once you enter a security code that code must be used for both front panel and remote operation For example if you secure the function generator from the front panel you must use that same code to unsecure it from the remote interface e Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Secure On softkey from the Test Cal menu e Remote Interface Operation To secure the function generator send the following command with the correct security code CAL SECURE STATE ON AT33220A 142 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview To Change the Security Code To change the security code you must first unsecure the function generator and then enter a new code Make sure you have read the security code rules described on page 141 before attempting to change the security code Front Panel Operation To change the security code unsecure the function generator using the old security code Then press and select the Secure Code softkey from the Test Cal menu Changing the code from
180. g In connector or continuously output sweeps or bursts using an internal trigger At power on internal trigger is selected 115 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering The trigger source setting is stored in volatile memory the source is set to internal trigger front panel or immediate remote interface when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Provided that the Power On state is set to Default Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps or bursts press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey Remote Interface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal Bus The APPLy command automatically sets the source to Immediate Internal Triggering In the internal trigger mode the function generator continuously outputs the sweep or burst as specified by the sweep time or burst period This is the default trigger source for both front panel and remote interface use Front Panel Operation Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Int softkey e Remote Interface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Manual Triggering In the manual trigger mode front panel only you can manually trigger the function generator by pressing the front panel key The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst for each time you press the key The key is illuminated while the function generator is waiting for a manual trigge
181. g In connector 118 Trig Out connector 119 trigger sources 115 218 221 224 tutorial 311 TXCO timebase 248 350 Index U UNIT ANGLe command 249 units as part of command 184 burst phase 221 converting voltage 19 units amplitude 62 units voltage 165 USB connector 6 USB configuration 135 V version SCPI 134 245 VOLTage HIGH command 178 HIGH command 178 LOW command 178 LOW command 178 OFFSet command 177 OFFSet command 177 RANGe AUTO command 179 AUTO command 179 UNIT command 184 voltage autorange 179 322 voltage autoranging 66 VOLTage command 175 voltage overload 66 voltage units 62 165 184 converting 19 VOLTage command 175 vpp 62 184 vrms 62 184 W waveform imperfections 320 waveform invert 67 waveform output connector 66 enable disable 66 181 polarity 67 waveform polarity 67 waveform tutorial 311 waveforms point interpolation 122 wideband FM 329 width puise definition 187 Z zero phase reference 249 oo 302 x Q g bens a Pe meng X 3 a Sey Sree onl E x i 8 Py 3 Aire costed one Spat appa ii z METIEN OE ee tetet og y i i gt g fs f EN i sei sih n Eee fperetttong 5 s meva afte eats EA Ne gt a 3 3 SES a ari j i we ospi D E r A q gt a Date Ray Corson DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY According to ISONEC Guide 22 and CEN
182. ge for the function currently selected e Limits Due to Amplitude The output amplitude and offset are related to Vmax as shown below Voffset Vpp 2 lt Vmax where Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load The new offset specified in the VOLT OFFS command will be set but the amplitude may be reduced accordingly and a Settings conflict error generated Limits Due to Output Termination The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting For example if you set the offset to 100 mVde and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the offset voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 200 mVdc and no error will be generated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed offset will drop in half See the OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited ifthe waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts Gnto 50 ohms 177 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands You can also s
183. generic message indicates that the desired pulse width is limited to an upper or lower boundary which is dictated by the instrument hardware 290 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors 222 Data out of range pulse edge time value clipped to This generic message indicates that the desired edge time is limited to an upper or lower boundary which is dictated by the instrument hardware 222 Data out of range FM deviation value clipped to This generic message indicates that the desired FM deviation is limited to a lower or upper boundary as set by the current function s frequency 222 Data out of range FM deviation limited by minimum frequency The frequency deviation is limited to the lower limit 1 Hz 222 Data out of range EFM deviation limited by maximum frequency value clipped to upper limit The frequency deviation cannot exceed the carrier frequency and is limited as follows 10 05 MHz for sine or square wave carriers 150 kHz for a ramp or 3 05 MHz for an arbitrary waveform 222 Data o t of range PWM deviation The PWM deviation is limited Width deviation can be from 0 to the width of the underlying pulse waveform Duty cycle deviation can be from 0 to the duty cycle of the underlying pulse waveform Both are further limited by the minimum pulse width and edge time parameters 222 Data out of range PWM deviation limited by pulse parameters The PWM deviation is limited by the current pulse par
184. gnal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT Ifyou select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The phase deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the phase deviation to 180 degrees using the PM DEV command then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce a negative phase shift PM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER y Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty eyele Be e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry Pa Select TRP for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry a m e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automa
185. he FUNC PULS HOLD command for further information 187 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse duty cycle in percent The the pulse duty cycle is defined as Duty Cycle 100 X Pulse Width Period where the pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge The pulse duty cycle range is 0 percent to 100 percent However the pulse duty cycle is limited by minimum pulse width and edge time restrictions which prevent you from setting exactly 0 percent or 100 percent For example for a 1 kHz pulse waveform you are typically restricted to pulse duty cycles in the range 0 002 percent to 99 998 percent limited by the minimum pulse width of 20 ns The default pulse duty cycle is 10 percent MIN is approximately 0 MAX is approximately 100 The DCYC query returns the pulse duty cycle in percent The width and edge restrictions are described below The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following restrictions determined by the minimum pulse width Wmin The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described Duty Cycle gt 1
186. he default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform e Front Panel Operation Press any of the front panel function keys except or Nese For arbitrary waveforms press and then choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Front Panel Operation To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 15 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for AM Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle EN e Ramp has 100 symmetry Ma e Triangle has 50 symmetry A e Negative ramp has
187. he error queue and cancels a OPC operation STATus PRESet Clear all bits in the Questionable Data enable register and the Standard Operation enable register psc 0 1 PSC Power On Status Clear Clear the Standard Event enable register and Status Byte condition register at power on PSC 1 When PSC 0 is in effect these two registers are not cleared at power on The default is psc 1 The PSC query returns the power on status clear setting Returns 0 do not clear at power on or 1 clear at power on 3 ae 3 OPC Set the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have completed When used with a bus triggered sweep or burst you may have the opportunity to execute commands after the OPC command and before the Operation Complete bit is set in the register 263 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Calibration Commands Calibration Commands For an overview of the calibration features of the function generator refer to Calibration Overview in chapter 3 starting on page 141 For a detailed discussion of the function generator s calibration procedures refer to chapter 4 in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide CALibration SECure STATe OFF ON lt code gt CALibration SECure STATe Unsecure or secure the instrument for calibration The calibration code may contain up to 12 characters The STAT query returns 0 OFF or
188. he level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform For a noise waveform the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false 334 Specifications Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Waveforms Standard Sine Square Ramp Triangle Pulse Noise DC Built in Arbitrary Exponential rise Exponential fall Negative ramp Sin x x Cardiac Waveform Characteristics Sine Frequency Range 1 pHz 20 MHz Amplitude Flatness 1 41 ative io 100 Re 100 kHz to 5 MHz 0 15 dB 5 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 dB Harmonic Distortion I S ee SS Total Harmonic Distortion 2 R DC to 20 kHz 0 04 Spurious Non Harmonic Distortion 1 I DC to 1 MHz 70 dBc 1 MHz to 20 MHz 70 dBc 6 dB octave Phase Noise 10 kHz offset 115 dBc Hz typical 336 Square Frequency Range Rise Fall Time Overshoot Variable Duty Cycle Asymmetry 50 Duty Jitter Ramp friangle Frequency Range Linearity Variable Symmetry Pulse Frequency Range Pulse Width period lt 10 s Variable Edge Time Overshoot
189. he same connector that is used for externally modulated AM FM PM and PWM waveforms Modulation In When used for FSK the Trig In connector does not have adjustable edge polarity and is not affected by the TRIG SLOP command 201 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands FSKey FREQuency lt requency gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the FSK alternate or hop frequency Select from 1 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz MIN 1 pHz MAX 20 MHz The FREQ query returns the hop frequency in hertz FSKey INTernal RATE lt rate in Hz gt MINimum MAXimun FSKey INTernal RATE MINimum MAXimum Set the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier and hop frequency Select from 2 mHz to 100 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 100 kHz The RATE query returns the FSK rate in hertz The FSK rate is only used when the Internal source is selected FSK SOUR INT command and is ignored when the external source is selected FSK SOUR EXT command The modulating waveform is a square wave with a 50 duty cycle FSKey STATe OFF ON FSKey STATe Disable or enable FSK modulation To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable FSK after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or
190. he square function the previous duty cycle is used Limits Due to Frequency If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency e The duty cycle setting does not apply to a square waveform used as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM A 50 duty cycle is always used for a modulating square waveform The duty cycle setting applies only to a square waveform carrier Front Panel Operation After selecting the square wave function press the Duty Cycle softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired duty cycle 64 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum The APPLy command automatically sets the duty cycle to 50 Symmetry Ramp Waves Applies to ramp waves only Symmetry represents the amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising assuming that the waveform is not inverted 0 Symmetry 100 Symmetry The symmetry is stored in volatile memory the symmetry is set to 100 the default when power has been off or after a remote i
191. ibit severe ringing for waveforms other than continuous sine waves a linear phase filter is used for all other waveform functions For standard waveforms and arbitrary waveforms that are defined with fewer than 16 384 16K points the function generator uses waveform memory that is 16K words deep For arbitrary waveforms that are defined with more than 16K points the function generator uses waveform memory that is 65 536 64K words deep 313 Chapter 7 Tutorial Direct Digital Synthesis The 33220A represents amplitude values by 16 384 discrete voltage levels or 14 bit vertical resolution The specified waveform data is divided into samples such that one waveform cycle exactly fills waveform memory see the illustration below for a sine wave If you create an arbitrary waveform that does not contain exactly 16K or 64K points the waveform is automatically stretched by repeating points or by interpolating between existing points as needed to fill waveform memory Since all of waveform memory is filled with one waveform cycle each memory location corresponds to a phase angle of 2x 16 384 radians or 27n 65 536 radians 8191 DAC Memory Address Code Phase 8191 Sine Wave Representation in Waveform Memory Direct digital synthesis DDS generators use a phase accumulation technique to control waveform memory addressing Instead of using a counter to generate sequential memory addresses an adder is used see
192. ically selects 50 FUNC SQU DCYC command For ramp waveforms overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 FUNC RAMP SYMM command 168 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy SINusoid lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a sine wave with the specified frequency amplitude and de offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLy SQUare lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt 1 Output a square wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset This command overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLy RAMP lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a ramp wave with the specified frequency amplitude and de offset This command overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLy PULSe lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a pulse wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed cose e This command preserves the current pulse width setting FUNC PULS WIDT command or pulse duty cycle setting PUNC PULS DCYC command depending on which has been selected to hold FUNC PULS
193. il ISM est conforme a la norme NMB 001 1998 du Canada Safety IEC 61010 1 2001 EN 61010 1 2001 Canada CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 1 1994 21 February 2003 Product Regulations Program Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor
194. ill be skipped If too many points are skipped a phenomenon known as aliasing will occur and the waveform output will become somewhat distorted The Nyquist Sampling Theorem states that in order to prevent aliasing the highest frequency component of the desired output waveform must be less than half of the sampling frequency 25 MHz for the 33220A 315 Chapter 7 Tutorial Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Creating Arbitrary Waveforms The Agilent 33220A allows you to create arbitrary waveforms of up to 64 K points 65 536 points and provides five built in examples of arbitrary waveforms You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel or you can use the Agilent IntuiLink software provided on the CD ROM included with the Agilent 33220A The Agilent IntuiLink software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface on your PC and then download them into the Agilent 33220A You can also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and import them into IntuiLink Please see the online help included with the Agilent IntuiLink software for further information For most applications it is not necessary to create an arbitrary waveform with a specific number of points since the function generator will repeat points or interpolate as necessary to fill waveform memory For example if you specify 100 points each waveform point will be repeated an average of 16 384 100 or 163 84 times Fo
195. ilt In Help System View the list of help topics Press the key to view the list of available help topics To scroll through the list press the or J softkey or rotate the knob Select the third topic Get HELP on any key and then press SELECT Get HELP on any key To get context sensitive help on any front parel key or merdi softkey press arid hold down that key HESS Press DONE to exit Help View the help information for displayed messages Whenever a limit is exceeded or any other invalid configuration is found the function generator will display a message For example if you enter a value that exceeds the frequency limit for the selected function a message will be displayed The built in help system provides additional information on the most recent message to be displayed Press the key select the first topic View the last message displayed and then press SELECT Frequency upper limit 20 000 000MH2 The specified valie exceeds the upper limit for this parameter The instrument has set the parameter equal ta the upper limit BME Press DONE to exit Help Local Language Help The built in help system in available in multiple languages All messages context sensitive help and help topics appear in the selected language The menu softkey labels and status line messages are not translated To select the local language press the key press the System softkey and then press the He
196. included to give you added flexibility Center frequency 1 u Hz te 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 550 Hz Frequency span 0 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 900 Hz To sweep up in frequency set a positive frequency span To sweep down in frequency set a negative frequency span For sweeps with Marker Off the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Syne signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the sync waveform is equal to the specified sweep time The signal is output from the front panel Sync connector For sweeps with Marker On the Sync signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency The signal is output from the front panel Syne connector Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps press the Start or Stop softkey again to toggle to the Center or Span softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired values Remote Interface Operation FREQuency CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 101 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Sweep Mode You can sweep with either linear or logarithmic spacing For a linear sweep the function generator varies the output freque
197. ine wave from 50 Hz to 5 kHz You will not change the other parameters from their default settings internal sweep trigger linear spacing and 1 second sweep time Select the function and amplitude for the sweep For sweeps you can select sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed For this example select a sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select the sweep mode Press and then verify that the linear sweep mode is currently selected Notice that a status message Linear Sweep is shown in the upper left corner of the display Set the start frequency Press the Start softkey and then set the value to 50 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys LIAGar SWRA Trfernal Trigger 50 000 000 Hz WY EF ME BEA SEE Sweep Marker Trigger Log itenter Spar Time BG Set lin 42 pottery Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Frequency Sweep 4 Set the stop frequency Press the Stop softkey and then set the value to 5 kHz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Linear Sweep internal Trigger 5 Er 000 00 kHz WS Fel Linea Sweep Marker Trigger i Of Setup iog SEN WRR Time At this point the function generator outputs a continuous sweep from 50 Hz to 5 kHz if the output is enabled Note If desired you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a center frequency and frequency span These parameters a
198. ing edge The default is POS The SLOP query returns POS or NEG When the Immediate internal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector The period of the waveform is equal to the specified burst period BURS INT PER command When the External trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command or when the Gated mode is selected BURS MODE GAT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the burst When the Bus software trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR BUS command the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 ps pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each burst OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON oOuTPut TRIGger Disable or enable the trigger out signal used with burst and sweep only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge OUTP TRIG SLOP command is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst The default is OFF The TRIG query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 223 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Triggering Commands Triggering Commands Applies to Sweep and Burst only See also Triggering
199. ion To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLY command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 3 86 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PM e Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle LJ Ramp has 100 symmetry gee e Triangle has 50 symmetry as e Negative ramp has 0 symmetry a You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform e Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation e Front Panel Operation After enabling PM press the Shape softkey Remote Interface Operation PM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PM e Modulating frequency internal source 2 mHz to 20 kHz The defau
200. ion and the pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front panel interface If you select Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Width Dev softkey is available On the other hand if you select Dty Cyc for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Dty Cyc Dev softkey ts available 97 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PWM Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal e Ifyou select the External source the pulse waveform is modulated with an external waveform The width deviation or duty cycle deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the duty cycle to 10 and the duty cycle deviation to 5 then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum duty cycle 15 When the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the minimum duty cycle 5 Modulation in lO LBY nS raan i me e Front Panel Operation After enabling PWM press the Source softkey e Remote Interface Operation PWM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 98 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Frequency Sweep In the frequency sweep mode the function generator steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at
201. ip In softkey Select the desired language 23 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the Function Generator To Rack Mount the Function Generator You can mount the Agilent 33220A in a standard 19 inch rack cabinet using one of two optional kits available Instructions and mounting hardware are included with each rack mounting kit Any Agilent System II instrument of the same size can be rack mounted beside the Agilent 33220A Note Remove the carrying handle and the front and rear rubber bumpers before rack mounting the instrument To remove the handle rotate it to vertical and pull the ends outward Front Rear bottom view To remove the rubber bumper stretch a corner and then slide it off 29 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the Function Generator O IAN BASA s An BABS A RES ea To rack mount two instruments side by side order lock link kit 5061 9694 and flange kit 5063 9212 Be sure to use the support rails in the rack cabinet Note The lock link kit works only for instruments of equal depth If you want to mount an Agilent 33220A and an instrument of a different depth for example an Agilent 33250A contact your Agilent Representative for further information in order to prevent overheating do not block the flow of air into or out of the instrument Be sure to allow enough clearance at the rear sides and bottom of the instrument to permit adequate internal air flow 30
202. is 100 mVpp into 50Q for all functions MIN selects the smallest amplitude 1 mVpp into 500 MAX selects the largest amplitude for the selected function at most 10 Vpp into 50Q depending on the selected function and offset voltage The VOLT query returns the output amplitude for the function currently selected Values are always returned in the units set by the most recent VOLT UNIT command Offset Voltage Limitations The output amplitude and offset are related to Vmax as shown below Voffset Vpp 2 lt Vmax where Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load The new amplitude specified in the VOLT command will be set but the offset voltage may be reduced accordingly and a Settings conflict error generated e Limits Due to Output Termination If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude will be automatically adjusted and no error will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half For more information see the OUTP LOAD command on page 182 e You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms or dBm by specifying the units as
203. is disabled To enable the Output connector press the key If the function generator does not turn on verify that the power cord is firmly connected to the power receptacle on the rear panel the power line voltage is automatically sensed at power on You should also make sure that the function generator is connected to a power source that is energized Then verify that the function generator is turned on if the power on self test fails Self Test Failed is displayed along with an error code See the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for information on error codes and for instructions on returning the function generator to Agilent for service 15 Ion e BO Ae Dr o Eo O A Retracted Extended To adjust the position grasp the handle by the sides and pull outward Then rotate the handle to the desired position To Adjust the Carrying Handle To Adjust the Carrying Handle pm amp g n 2 R s rT berg G bent ch ias A O 16 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Output Frequency To Set the Output Frequency At power on the function generator outputs a sine wave at 1 kHz with an amplitude of 100 mV peak to peak into a 50Q termination The following steps show you how to change the frequency to 1 2 MHz Press the Freq softkey The displayed frequency is either the power on value or the frequency previously selected When you change functions the same
204. istortion at low amplitude is lim ited by 75 dBm typical 5 Add 1 ppm C average for operation out side the range 18 C to 28 C 6 ESK uses trigger input 1 MHz maximum 7 Sine and square waveforms above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count 339 Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Product Dimensions tateratatetsh gt ge oggogn M4 X Q 7 4 PLACES 4441 All dimensions are shown in millimeters 340 Index Ifyou have questions relating to the operation of the Agilent 33220A call 1 800 452 4844 in the United States or contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Office 10 MHz In connector 248 10 MHz Out connector 248 CLS command 263 ESE command 262 IDN command 243 LRN command 245 OPC command 213 222 246 263 OPC command 218 222 246 PSC command 263 RCL command 239 RST command 245 SAV command 238 SRE command 260 STB command 254 260 TRG command 213 222 225 TST command 245 WAI command 218 222 246 A ac connector 6 address GPIB 135 Agilent Express 7 air flow 30 aliasing 315 AM 74 carrier frequency 75 carrier waveform 75 front panel operation 36 INTernal FREQuency command 192 FUNCtion command 191 modulating frequency 192 modulating source 78 191 modulating waveform 76 191 modulation depth 77 328 modulation source 78 overview 190 SOURce command 191 STATe com
205. itude AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected AM SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle PL Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry a Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry P Ls Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 191 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Amplitude Modulation AM Commands AM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum AM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected AM SOUR INT command _ Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 100 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in hertz AM DEPTh lt depth in percent gt MINimum MAXimum AM DEPTh MINimum
206. itude modulation the amplitude of the carrier is varied by the amplitude of the modulating waveform For this example you will output an AM waveform with 80 modulation depth The carrier will be a 5 kHz sine wave and the modulating waveform will be a 200 Hz sine wave Select the function frequency and amplitude of the carrier Press and then press the Freq Ampl and Offset softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example select a 5 kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select AM Press and then select AM using the Type softkey Notice that a status message AM by Sine is shown in the upper left corner of the display Set the modulation depth Press the AM Depth softkey and then set the value to 80 using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys 36 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Modulated Waveform 4 Set the modulating frequency Press the AM Freq softkey and then set the value to 200 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys WF Hz _ 99 ag SF W W 5 Select the modulating waveform shape Press the Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform For this example select a sine wave At this point the function generator outputs an AM waveform with the specified modulation parameters if the output is enabled 6 View the waveform Press to view the waveform parameters To turn off the Graph Mode press
207. just the duty cycle from 20 to 80 for output frequencies up to 10 MHz The following steps show you how to change the duty cycle to 30 1 Select the square wave function Press the key and then set the desired output frequency to any value up to 10 MHz 2 Press the Duty Cycle softkey The displayed duty cycle is either the power on value or the percentage previously selected The duty cycle represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level note the icon on the right side of the display 50 0 LL rarere ihiihi a Pa Y 5 A a pute Feriod HiLeval Lalevell Cycle 3 Enter the desired duty cycle Using the numeric keypad or the knob select a duty cycle value of 30 The function generator adjusts the duty cycle immediately and outputs a square wave with the specified value if the output is enabled 30 FD al Pa EA Ap A uy Period HiLeyel Loalevell Cege 23 1 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Configure a Pulse Waveform To Configure a Pulse Waveform You can configure the function generator to output a pulse waveform with variable pulse width and edge time The following steps show you how to configure a 500 ms pulse waveform with a pulse width of 10 ms and edge times of 50 ns Select the pulse function Press the key to select the pulse function and output a pulse waveform with the default parameters Set the pulse period Press the Period softk
208. kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms using the FSK FREQ command Set the FSK rate Set the FSK rate to any value from 2 mHz to 100 kHz using the FSK INT RATE command internal FSK source only The FSK rate sets the pace at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and the hop frequency Enable FSK modulation After you have set up the other FSK parameters use the FSK STAT ON command to enable FSK modulation 200 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands FSK Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform FSKey SOURce INTernal XTernal FSKey SOURce Select an internal or external FSK source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT When the Internal source is selected the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and hop frequency is determined by the FSK rate specified FSK INT RATE command e When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output e The maximum external FSK rate is 1 MHz e Note that the connector used for externally controlled FSK waveforms Trig In is not t
209. key to store the waveform in one of four non volatile memory locations You can assign a custom name to the four non volatile memory locations e The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character _ To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob To delete all characters to the right of the cursor press the key For this example assign the name RAMP_NEW to memory location 1 and then press the STORE ARB softkey to store the waveform RAMP_NEM rb b afb arb STORE Hemi Mem MemS Sead ARB CANCEL The waveform is now stored in non volatile memory and is currently being output from the function generator The name that you used to store the waveform should now appear in the list of stored waveforms under the Stored Wform softkey 124 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Additional Information on Arbitrary Waveforms e Asa shortcut to determine which arbitrary waveform is selected press a gt A temporary message is displayed on the front panel e In addition to creating a new arbitrary waveform from the front panel you can also edit any existing user defined waveforms You can edit waveforms that were created either from the front panel or from the remote interface However you
210. l Note The CD ROM provided with your instrument contains connectivity software to enable communications over these interfaces Refer to the instructions provided on the CD ROM to install this software on your PC GPIB Configuration You need only select a GPIB address 1 Select the I O menu Press and then press the I O softkey w H GPIB f hiy Address LAN USE Td LERNE 2 Select the GPIB address Use the knob and cursor keys or the numeric keypad to select a GPIB address in the range 0 through 30 the factory default is 10 The GPIB address is shown on the front panel display at power on 3 Exit the menu Press the DONE softkey 48 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interface USB Configuration The USB interface requires no front panel configuration parameters Just connect your Agilent 33220A to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure Press the Show USB Id softkey in the I O menu to see the USB interface identification string LAN Configuration There are several parameters that you may need to set to establish network communication using the LAN interface Primarily you will need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communication with the LAN interface Select the I O menu Press and then press the VO softkey o i ad GPTE Show addre
211. lation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow PM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PM the sweep or burst mode is turned off Front Panel Operation You must enable PM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press and then select PM using the Type softkey The PM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable PM after you have set up the other modulation parameters PM STATe OFF ON 85 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Carrier Waveform Shape e PM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform The default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or de as the carrier waveform e Front Panel Operation Press any of the front panel function keys except or For arbitrary waveforms press and then choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency e Front Panel Operat
212. le FSK after you have set up the other modulation parameters FSKey STATe OFF ON me 89 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation Carrier Waveform Shape e FSK carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform The default ts Sine You cannot use pulse noise or de as the carrier waveform e Front Panel Operation Press any of the front panel function keys except or For arbitrary waveforms press and then choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command FSK Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 20 MHz Square 20 MHz Ramp 200 KHz Arbs 6 MHz e When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output e Front Panel Operation To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequ
213. le memory You can download from 1 point a de signal to 65 536 64K points per waveform You can download the points as floating point values binary integer values or decimal integer values Use the DATA command to download floating point values from 1 0 to 1 0 Use the DATA DAC command to download binary integer or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 To ensure that binary data is downloaded properly you must select the order in which the bytes are downloaded using the FORM BORD command Select the waveform frequency amplitude and offset Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform 227 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands Copy the arbitrary waveform to non volatile memory You can output the arbitrary waveform directly from volatile memory or you can copy the waveform to non volatile memory using the DATA COPY command Select the arbitrary waveform to output You can select one of the five built in arbitrary waveforms one of four user defined waveforms or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory Use the FUNC USER command to select the waveform Output the selected arbitrary waveform Use the FUNC USER command to output the waveform previously selected with the FUNC USER command The five built in arbitrary waveforms are shown below ee ety Exponenti
214. limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The sweep is phase continuous over the full frequency range The default start frequency is 100 Hz The default stop frequency is 1 kHz To sweep up in frequency set the start frequency lt stop frequency To sweep down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency For sweeps with Marker Off the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the sync waveform is equal to the specified sweep time The signal is output from the front panel Sync connector For sweeps with Marker On the Sync signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency The signal is output from the front panel Syne connector Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps press the Start or Stop softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface Operation FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 100 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Center Frequency and Frequency Span If desired you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a center frequency and frequency span These parameters are similar to the start frequency and stop frequency see the previous page and are
215. litude they have no effect on the dc output but the values are remembered when you change to a different function The following statement shows the use of the APPLy command for a de output APPL DC DEF DEF 2 5 APPLYy USER lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC USER command The waveform is output using the specified frequency amplitude and de offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed See page 227 for more information on downloading arbitrary waveforms to memory 170 protons ceneenneeen op Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLY Query the function generator s current configuration and return a quoted string The purpose of this command is to allow you to append this query response to an APPL command in your programming application and use the result to place the function generator in the specified state The function frequency amplitude and offset are returned as shown in the sample string below the quotation marks are returned as part of the string SIN 5 0000000000000E 03 3 0000000000000E 00 2 5000000000000E 00 171 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands Output Configuration Commands See also Output Configuration starting on page 55 in chapter 3 This section describes the low level commands used to program the function
216. litude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators The amplitude is controlled however so the output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching ranges To prevent this disruption in the output you can disable the voltage autoranging feature using the VOLT RANG AUTO command see page 179 for more information e You can also set the amplitude with an associated offset voltage by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an associated offset voltage of 500 mV See the VOLT HIGH and VOLT LOW commands on page 178 for more information To output a de voltage level select the de voltage function using the FUNC DC command and then set the offset voltage level using the VOLT OFFS command You can set the de level to any value between 5 Vde into 50 ohms or 10 Vde into an open circuit 176 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands voLTage OFFSet lt offset gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage OFFSet MINimum MAXimum Set the de offset voltage The default offset is 0 volts for all functions MIN selects the most negative dc offset voltage for the selected function and amplitude MAX selects the largest dc offset for the selected function and amplitude The OFFS query returns the offset volta
217. lt is 10 Hz Front Panel Operation After enabling PM press the PM Freq softkey e Remote Interface Operation PM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 87 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Phase Deviation The phase deviation setting represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform The phase deviation can be set from 0 to 360 degrees The default is 180 degrees e Since a 360 degree phase deviation is equivalent to 0 degrees the maximum effective deviation setting is 180 degrees e Front Panel Operation After enabling PM press the Phase Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation Remote Interface Operation PM DEViation lt deviation in degrees gt MINimum MAXimum Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PM Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal Ifyou select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The phase deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 180 degrees then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase shift Lower external signal levels produce less deviation Moduiation 5 V _ OV EN sae eet e Front Panel
218. ltage 325 percent modulation AM 77 192 328 period burst mode 111 front panel selection 17 pulse waveform 70 period pulse 185 PHASe REFerence command 249 UN Leek ERRor STATe command 249 phase burst 112 PHASe command 248 phase errors 321 phase lock 248 error on unlock 249 phase offset 248 rear panel connections 248 phase modulation carrier frequency 86 carrier waveform 86 modulating frequency 199 modulating source 88 198 modulating waveform 87 modulation waveshape 198 overview 197 phase deviation 88 199 phase noise 321 336 phase offset phase lock 248 phase quantization errors 321 phase units burst phase 221 OUTPut command 181 p a Output connector 181 parameter types 270 output frequency password calibration 141 burst limitations 57 347 Index phase burst 220 PM 87 carrier frequency 86 carrier waveform 86 commands 198 DEViation command 199 INT command 198 IN Ternal FREQuency command 199 FUNCtion command 198 modulating frequency 199 modulating source 88 198 modulating waveform 87 modulation 85 modulation waveshape 198 overview 197 phase deviation 88 199 SOURce command 198 STATe command 199 point interpolation 122 polarity 67 polarity trigger 214 222 225 polarity waveform 67 positive trigger slope 214 222 225 power connector 6 power cord 15 power switch 15 power down recali 126 241 product dimensions 340 product overview 2 product specifications 335 programming comm
219. mains enabled The DISP query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e With the front panel display disabled there will be some improvement in command execution speed from the remote interface e Sending a message to the front panel display from the remote interface DISP TEXT command overrides the display state This means that you can display a message even if the display is disabled remote interface errors are always displayed even if the display is disabled e The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled after an instrument reset RST command or when you return to local front panel operation Press the key or execute the IEEE 488 GTL Go To Local command from the remote interface to return to the local state e The display state is saved when you store the instrument state using SAV command When you recall the instrument state using RCL command the front panel display will return to the previous state 243 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands DISPlay TEXT lt quoted string gt DISPlay TEXT Display a text message on the function generator s front panel display Sending a text message to the display overrides the display state as set by the DISP command The TEXT query reads the message sent to the front panel display and returns a quoted string You can use upper or lower case letters A Z numbers 0 9 and any other character on a standard computer keyboard
220. mand 192 tutorial description 327 amplitude 18 arb waveform limitations 59 166 dBm limitations 175 high low level 176 load limitations 58 165 175 offset limitations 58 175 range hold 66 tutorial description 322 unit limitations 58 units 62 amplitude modulation 74 79 carrier frequency 75 carrier waveform 75 front panel operation 36 modulating frequency 192 modulating source 78 191 modulating waveform 76 modulation depth 77 328 modulation waveshape 191 overview 190 tutorial description 327 amplitude units converting 19 angle phase burst 220 221 anti aliasing filters 313 application programs 301 APPLy DC command 170 NOISe command 170 PULSe command 169 RAMP command 169 SUNusoid command 169 SQUare command 169 USER command 170 APPLy command 163 operations performed 163 APPLy command 171 arbitrary waveform downloading binary values 230 downloading floating point values 229 downloading integer values 230 front panel operation 26 arbitrary waveform limitations 176 arbitrary waveforms amplitude limitations 166 as modulating waveshape 125 built in waveforms 26 228 calculating crest factor 237 creating from front panel 120 deleting from memory 236 error messages 299 front panel rules 123 naming 124 overview 227 point interpolation 122 rules 125 tutorial description 316 attenuator settings 179 automatic power down recall 241 autorange 179 322 autoranging amplitude 66 341 Index B b
221. me to a stored state to be recalled from the front panel send the following command From the remote interface you can only recall a stored state using a number 0 through 4 MEM STATE NAME 1 TEST WFORM 1 To configure the function generator to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored send the following command MEMory STATe RECal1l AUTO ON 128 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Sysiem Related Operations Error Conditions A record of up to 20 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in the function generator s error queue See chapter 5 for a complete listing of the errors Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them The function generator beeps once each time an error is generated unless you have disabled the beeper If more than 20 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the function generator responds with No error e The error queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the error queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command Front Panel Operation Pre
222. meters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 154 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Burst Commands see page 216 for more information BURSt MODE TRIGgered GATed BURSt MODE BURSt NCYCles lt cycles gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum BURSt NCYCles MINimum MAXimum BURSt INTernal PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt INTernal PERiod MINimum MAXimum BURSt PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt PHASe MINimum MAXimum BURSt STATe OFF ON BURSt STATe UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS Triggered Burst TRIGger SOURcCe TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig In Connector TRIGger SLOPe BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted External Gated Burst BURSt GATE POLarity OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger OFF ON TRiGger Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 155 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Arbitrary Waveform Commands see page 227 for more information DATA VOLATILE lt value gt lt value gt DATA DAC VOLATILE lt binary block gt lt value gt lt value gt FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped Specify Byte Order FORMat BORDer DATA COPY lt destination arb name gt VOLATILE FUNCtion USER lt arb name gt VOLA
223. mmand TRIGger SOURce BUS To trigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN when the Bus source selected send the TRIG or TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger 117 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering Trigger Input Signal Trig in Out INPUT FSK Burst oe Rising edge shown This rear panel connector is used in the following modes Triggered Sweep Mode To select the external source press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey or execute the TRIG SOUR EXT command from the remote interface sweep must be enabled When the rising or falling edge you specify which edge of a TTL pulse is received on the Trig In connector the function generator outputs a single sweep Externally Modulated FSK Mode To enable the externally modulated mode press the Source softkey from the front panel or execute the FSK SOUR EXT command from the remote interface FSK must be enabled When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output The maximum external FSK rate is 100 kHz Triggered Burst Mode To select the external source press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey or execute the TRIG SOUR EXT command from the remote interface burst must be enabled The function ge
224. mote Interface Operation PWM INTernal FREQuency lt requency gt MINimum MAXimum 95 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Width Deviation The width deviation represents the variation in width Gin seconds in the modulated waveform from the width of the original pulse waveform Width deviation 0s to 1000 s see below The default is 10 us The width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width The width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Width Deviation lt Pulse Width Wmin and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width Wmin where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100s Wmin 2 ps for period gt 100 s but lt 1000s Wmin 20 ps for period gt 1000 s e The width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting Width Deviation lt Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time e Front Panel Operation After enabling PWM press the Width Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation Remote Interface Operation PWM DEViation lt deviation in seconds gt MINimum MAXimum Note The pulse width and width deviation and the pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front panel interface If you select Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Width Dev softkey is
225. mport them into IntuiLink Please see the online help included with the Agilent IntuiLink software for further information Refer to chapter 7 Tutorial for more information on the internal operation of downloading and outputting an arbitrary waveform To Create and Store an Arbitrary Waveform This section gives an example which shows you how to create and store an arbitrary waveform from the front panel To download an arbitrary waveform from the remote interface see Arbitrary Waveform Commands starting on page 227 For this example you will create and store the ramp waveform shown below using four waveform points Volt Div 1 Volt Time Div 1 ms rd Serr ries eee eee See See eee Oe eee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee See ee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee 2 ec ee Seay SEF A cae rare wapanena I E T E T E S A E a NENE EENE alee 0 ete bee Blk el eer en fe a Jada dinta Mei ee CO Ria Reidel EM Nami o O dina pti aia Manette a ei aan Ce i cc cc ee ec cs ac CC ee ce ac ce ee ee ec i ee ie ie io eee eerie ice 120 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms 1 Select the arbitrary waveform function When you press to select the arbitrary function a temporary message is displayed indicating which waveform is currently selected Start the arbitrary waveform editor Press the Create New softkey to start the waveform editor While in the waveform editor you define the waveform by specifying time and voitage values for e
226. n pM is very similar to put for pM the nase of the carrier WAV form 1 aried rather the frequency he variation 1 phase the modu q waveform from the carrie waveform is called the phase deviation h can vary fro o 360 degrees Note that since 360 degrees of deviation i equivalen degrees maximum effective deviation 1 4 9 degrees the default Keying ys similar to FM except the e alues The rate at which the the carrier equency rate generator or Frequency changes form with 50 duty cycle 100 KHZ Modulating signal modulated Carrier F equency Shift Keying 330 geet pe Chapter 7 Tutorial Modulation Pulse Width Moduiation PWM PWM is used in digital audio applications motor control circuitry switching power supplies and other control applications The Agilent 33220A provides PWM for pulse waveforms and PWM is the only type of modulation supported for pulse waveforms For PWM the amplitude of the modulating waveform is sampled digitally and used to control the pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform Modulating Signal ppeb bbebrpe peebeejooereej be beats Bi ower ee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee ree ee ee ee ee cee ee Aededeaejetetebed fedede pepe eee eae faae Modulated Waveform a E CE a ae a ate DEALE LE paie ay Pulse Width Modulation The variation of pulse width in the modulated waveform from the pulse width of the pulse waveform is called the width deviation
227. n Errors Data out of range amplitude value clipped to This generic message indicates that the waveform amplitude has been limited te an upper or lower boundary Data out of range offset value clipped to This generic message indicates that the offset voltage has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range frequency in burst mode value clipped to This generic message indicates that the frequency has been limited to an upper or lower boundary as dictated by the burst period Data out of range frequency in FM value clipped te This generic message indicates that the carrier frequency has been limited to a lower boundary as determined by the FM DEV command The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the frequency deviation Data out of range marker confined to sweep span value clipped to This generic message indicates that the specified marker frequency is outside the range of the start frequency and stop frequency The marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer This error is generated only when both the sweep mode and the marker frequency are enabled Data out of range pulse width vaiue clipped to This
228. n the Graph Mode How to synchronize multiple instruments How to obtain Agilent Technical Support 34 piece eens Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Select the Output Termination To Select the Output Termination The Agilent 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to the front panel Output connector If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect The load impedance setting is simply provided as a convenience to ensure that the displayed voltage matches the expected load Press x Navigate the menu to set the output termination Press the Output Setup softkey and then select the Load softkey p fo e Rance Ad just Tim Insert Phase BANE Select the desired output termination Use the knob or numeric keypad to select the desired load impedance or press the Load softkey again to choose High 2 To Reset the Function Generator To reset the instrument to its factory default state press and then select the Set to Defaults softkey Press YES to confirm the operation For a complete listing of the instrument s power on and reset conditions see Agilent 33220A Factory Default Settings on page 146 30 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Modulated Waveform To Output a Modulated Waveform A modulated waveform consists of a carrier and a modulating waveform In AM ampl
229. n these situations to minimize end point discontinuities and spectral leakage 0 90 180 270 360 0 90 180 270 360 pe 1 Cycle Arbitrary Waveform with Discontinuity ol Chapter 7 Tutorial Square Waveform Generation ee peed tl Nl fe UUU Oo 7100 200 300 400 500 660 70o 800 900 1 MHz tHe kHz kHe kHz kiz kHz kbe ki kHz Spectrum of Above Waveform at 100 kHz Square Waveform Generation To eliminate distortion due to aliasing at higher frequencies the 33220A uses a different waveform generation technique to create square waves Square waveforms are created by routing a DDS generated sine wave into a comparator The digital output from the comparator is then used as the basis for the square wave output The duty cycle of the waveform can be varied by changing the comparator s threshold ay Comparator Waveform Anti Aliasing DAC Filter Threshold Voltage DAC Square Waveform Generation Circuttry 318 Chapter 7 Tutorial Pulse Waveform Generation frequency from the DDS by five The rising and falling edge times are Controlled by a circuit that Varies the charging Currents in a capacitor Period Counter Edge Time 95 100 MHz Leading Edge Circuit gt St ee L ps Pad Flip Flop fy Width Counter Baig Trailing Edge a a Pulse Waveform Generation Circuitry 319 Chapter 7 Tutorial nodulation Phase Modulatio
230. nable PM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PM and AM at the same time When you enable PM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator wili not allow PM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PM the sweep or burst mode is turned off 199 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands See also FSK Modulation starting on page 89 in chapter 3 FSK Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an FSK modulated waveform The commands used for FSK are listed on the next page Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the FSK source The function generator will accept an internal or external FSK source Select the FSK source using the FSK SOUR command Select the FSK hop frequency Set the alternate or hop frequency to any value from 1 pHz to 20 MHz limited to 200
231. ncy in a linear fashion during the sweep For a logarithmic sweep the function generator varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion e Sweep mode Linear or Logarithmic The default is Linear Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps press the Linear softkey again to toggle between the linear or log mode Remote Interface Operation SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Sweep Time The sweep time specifies the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time you select e Sweep time 1 ms to 500 seconds The default is 1 second e Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps press the Sweep Time softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired sweep time Remote Interface Operation SWEep TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 102 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Marker Frequency If desired you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep The Sync signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep e Marker frequency 1 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 500 Hz When the sweep mode is enabled the marker frequency must be between the specified star
232. nd lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines you can send the abbreviated form For better program readability you can send the long form For example in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms You can use upper or lower case letters Therefore FREQUENCY freq and Freq are all acceptable Other forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error e Braces enclose the parameter choices for a given command string The braces are not sent with the command string e A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices for a given command string e Triangle brackets lt gt indicate that you must specify a value for the enclosed parameter For example the above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangle brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string You must specify a value for the parameter such as FREQ 5000 e Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The square brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the function generator chooses a default value 267 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language Command Separators A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower
233. nds SY STem SECurity IMMediate Clears all instrument memory except for the boot parameters and calibration constants Initializes all instrument settings to their RST values Destroys all user defined state information user defined arbitrary waveforms and user defined I O settings such as the IP address The built in arbitrary waveforms are not affected and the VOLATILE waveform persists until the power is turned off This command is typically used to clear all memory before removing the instrument from a secure area This command is not recommended for use in routine applications because of the possibility of unintended loss of data LRN Query the function generator and return a string of SCPI commands containing the current settings learn string You can then send the string back to the instrument to restore this state at a later time For proper operation do not modify the returned string before sending it to the function generator The returned string will contain about 1 500 characters OPC Set the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after all of the previous commands have been completed Other commands may be executed before the bit is set This command is used in the triggered sweep or triggered burst modes to provide a way to poll or interrupt the computer when the TRG command is complete OPC Return 1 to the output buffer after the previous commands have heen completed
234. needed to accommodate _ the specified period Pulse Width lt Period 1 6 X Edge Time The pulse width must also be greater than the total time of one edge as shown below Pulse Width gt 1 6 X Edge Time e Front Panel Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Width softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse width e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion PULSe WIDTh lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 71 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Pulse Duty Cycle The pulse duty cycle is defined as Duty Cycle 100 X Pulse Width Period where the pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge e Pulse duty cycle 0 to 100 see restrictions below The default is 10 The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following restrictions determined by the minimum pulse width Wmin The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period Duty Cycle gt 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 ys for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 ps for period gt 1000 s e The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following restriction determined by the edge time The function g
235. nel configuration 48 setting address 48 graph mode 25 ground loops 323 H handle changing positions 16 handie removing 29 harmonic distortion 336 header binary block 231 heart waveform 228 help system 27 language selection 28 high impedance load 63 high level 178 high Z load 35 63 high level setting 21 hop frequency 38 91 202 host name 138 I ID string 243 IEEE 488 address 135 connector 6 default address 48 front panel configuration 48 setting address 48 IEEE 488 binary block format 231 IR EE 488 service request 254 immediate trigger 213 221 224 impedance load 35 imperfections signal 320 instrument calibration commands 264 error messages 298 reading count 265 securing 264 storing text message 265 instrument errors 129 242 instrument ID string 248 instrument overview 2 instrument reset 35 245 instrument self test 131 instrument self test 245 instrument specifications 335 instrument state recall power down state 241 instrument state storage 126 238 naming 127 power down recall 126 instrument states naming from front panel 47 storing from front panel 47 instrument stored states default names 240 deleting from memory 240 345 Index integer download arbs 230 interface bus trigger 117 interface configuration 135 interface errors 129 242 internal trigger 116 213 221 224 interpolation 122 invert waveform 67 IP address 137 J jitter 321 L LAN co
236. nerator automatically disables the trigger out signal The Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep or burst When the Bus software or manual trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 ps pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps or burst press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey Remote Interface Operation OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON 119 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary Waveforms There are five built in arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory You can also store up to four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory in addition to one in volatile memory Each waveform can contain between 1 a de voltage and 65 536 64K data points You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel as described in the following section or you can use the Agilent IntuiLink software provided on the CD ROM included with the Agilent 33220A The Agilent IntuiLink software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface on your PC and then download them into the Agilent 33220A You can also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and i
237. nerator has adjusted the parameter to the minimum value allowed Example PHAS 1000 Data out of range pulse edge time limited by period value clipped to upper limit The specified edge time must fit within the existing period and width The function generator will limit the edge time as needed to accommodate the existing period Data out of range pulse width limited by period value clipped to The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the period and the edge time as shown below The function generator will adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period Pulse Width lt Period 1 6 X Edge Time Data out of range pulse duty cycle limited by period value clipped to The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following period and edge time restriction The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period Duty Cycle lt 100 X Period 1 6 X Edge Time Period 287 Qae 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range large period limits minimum pulse width For a pulse waveform the minimum pulse width is 20 ns for periods up to 10 seconds For periods above 10 seconds the minimum pulse width is greater See Pulse Configuration Commands in chapter 4 for further information Data out of range pulse edge time limited by width value cli
238. nerator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received from the specified trigger source External Gated Burst Mode To enable the gated mode press the Gated softkey or execute the BURS MODE GAT command from the remote interface burst must be enabled When the external gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the external gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is compieted and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase For noise the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false 118 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering Trigger Output Signal A trigger out signal is provided on the rear panel Trig Out connector used with sweep and burst only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with either a rising edge default or falling edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst Trig In Out OUTPUT FSK Burst SV aan ET OV Rising edge shown e When the Internal immediate trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst The period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time or burst period e When the External trigger source is selected the function ge
239. ng the present settings for frequency amplitude and offset unless you change them Exp Rise F xpo Neg all Rart Snc Cardiac CANCEL The selected waveform is now assigned to the key Whenever you press this key the selected arbitrary waveform is output To quickly determine which arbitrary waveform is currently selected press am 26 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Use the Built In Help System To Use the Built In Help System The built in help system is designed to provide context sensitive assistance on any front panel key or menu softkey A list of help topics is also available to assist you with several front panel operations View the help information for a function key Press and hold down the key If the message contains more information than will fit on the display press the J softkey or turn the knob clockwise to view the remaining information Sire Func The Agilent 332204 can output a sinusoidal wavefors at frequencies Trom 1 pHa fo 20 MHz For Be DONE Press DONE to exit Help View the help information for a menu softkey Press and hold down the Freq softkey If the message contains more information than will fit on the display press the J softkey or rotate the knob clockwise to view the remaining information Sets the waveform frequency or period Press this afike again fo toggle between the choices PONE Press DONE to exit Help at Chapter 1 Quick Start To Use the Bu
240. nguage SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments Refer to Simplified Programming Overview starting on page 161 for an introduction to the basic techniques used to program the function generator over the remote interface SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems A portion of the SOURce subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system SOURCE FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STARt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STOP MINimum MAXimum SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SPACing SWHep TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum TIME MINimum MAXimum SWHep STATe OFF ON STATe SOURce is the root keyword of the command FREQuency and SWEep are second level keywords and STARt and STOP are third level keywords A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword 266 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language Command Format Used in This Manual The format used to show commands in this manual is illustrated below FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper a
241. nnector 6 current configuration 140 DHCP 136 DNS server 139 domain name 139 front panel configuration 49 gateway 138 host name 138 IP address 137 subnet mask 137 LAN configuration 135 language SCPI overview 266 language help system 28 LCD display 4 bulb saver mode 130 leakage errors 317 learn string 245 linear interpolation 122 linear sweep 212 load 35 63 load impedance 323 load termination 35 346 local language help 28 local operation LAN 247 logarithmic sweep 212 low level 178 low level setting 21 M manual trigger 116 MARKer FREQuency command 215 marker frequency 103 215 marker signal 333 MAV 255 ME Mory NSTates command 241 STATe DELete command 240 NAME command 240 RECall AUTO command 241 VALid command 241 menu quick reference 33 menu operation 31 message calibration 144 265 message available MAV 255 messages error 273 modulation 36 89 AM 74 FM 78 FSK 89 PM 85 PWM 93 tutorial description 327 modulation depth AM 77 192 328 modulation depth percent modulation 36 Modulation In connector 78 84 92 98 modulation source AM 78 FSK 92 PWM 98 N name defaults for stored states 240 stored states 240 names arbitrary waveforms 124 stored states 127 naming stored states front panel operation 47 narrowband FM 329 n cycle burst 333 negative ramp waveform 228 negative trigger slope 214 222 225 new line 269 noise 170 number entry 5 number keypad 5 number of cycles
242. ns available to store arbitrary waveforms This error is likely the result of a failed Flash memory device Cannot overwrite a built in waveform The following built in waveform names are reserved and cannot be used with the DATA COPY command EXP_RISEH EXP_FALL NEG_RAMP SINO and CARDIAC Name of source arb waveform for copy must be VOLATILE When using the DATA COPY command you cannot copy from any source other than VOLATILE Specified arb waveform does not exist The DATA COPY command copies the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory Before executing the DATA COPY command you must download the waveform using the DATA VOLATILE or DATA DAC VOLATILE command 299 786 787 788 800 810 Not able to delete a built in arb waveform You cannot delete any of the five built in waveforms EXP_RISE EXP FALL NEG RAMP SINC and CARDIAC Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output FUNC USER command Cannot copy to VOLATILE arb waveform The DATA COPY command copies the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory The source for the copy is always VOLATILE You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy te VOLATILE Block length must be even The function generator repre
243. nt but the waveform frequency will not be changed From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the burst period will be adjusted as described e For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count e When the gated burst mode is selected the burst count is ignored However if you change the burst count while in the gated mode the function generator remembers the new count and will use it whe the triggered mode is selected 219 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt INTernal PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt INTernal PERiod MINimum MAXimum Set the burst period for internally triggered bursts The burst period defines time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst Select from 1 ps to 500 seconds The default is 10 ms MAX 500 s MIN based on the burst count and waveform frequency as shown below The PER query returns the burst period in seconds The burst period setting is used only when Immediate triggering is enabled TRIG SOUR IMM command The burst period is ignored when manual or external triggering is enabled or when the gated burst mode is selected o Itis not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the function generator to output with the specified burst count and frequency see below If the burst period is too short the function gene
244. nt in the continuous waveform mode Turns on the Output connector OUTP ON command but does not change the output termination setting OUTP LOAD command e Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging VOLT RANG AUTO command For square waveforms overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 FUNC SQU DCYC command For ramp waveforms overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 FUNC RAMP SYMM command The syntax statements for the APPLy command are shown on page 168 163 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command Output Frequency For the frequency parameter of the APPLy command the output frequency range depends on the function specified You can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEFault in place of a specific value for the frequency parameter MIN selects the lowest frequency allowed for the function specified and MAX selects the highest frequency allowed The default frequency is 1 kHz for all functions Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 whiz 20 MHz Ramp 1 Hz 200 kHz Pulse 500 pHz 5 MHz Noise DC Not Applicable Not Applicable Arbs 1 Hz 6 MHz Limits Due to Function The frequency hmits are determined by the function specified in the APPLy command The APPLy command always sets both the function and the frequency and the specifie
245. nterface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default The symmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp wave to another function When you return to the ramp function the previous symmetry is used Ifyou select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM the symmetry setting does not apply Front Panel Operation After selecting the ramp function press the Symmetry softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired symmetry e Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum The APPLy command automatically sets the symmetry to 100 65 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Voltage Autoranging Autoranging is enabled by default and the function generator automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and attenuators With autoranging disabled the function generator uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings e You can disable autoranging to eliminate momentary disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude However turning autoranging off has side effects The amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below a range change that would occur with autoranging on You may not be able to achieve the minimum amplitude that is available with autoranging on
246. o 0 0 V Press the Ampl softkey to select Ampl Press the softkey again to toggle to HiLevel Note that both the Ampl and Offset softkeys toggle together to HiLevel and LoLevel respectively Set the HiLevel value Using the numeric keypad or the knob select a value of 1 0 V Gf you are using the keypad you will need to select the unit V to enter the value Hoo v N mel Offzet one Press the LoLevel softkey and set the value Again use the numeric keypad or the knob to enter a value of 0 0 V s 000 Ne Perio a ro a ie Note that these settings high level 1 0 V and low level 0 0 V are equivalent to setting an amplitude of 1 0 Vpp and an offset of 500 mvVdec nal 21 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Select DC Volts To Select DC Volts You can select the DC Volts feature from the Utility menu and then set a constant de voltage as an Offset value Let s set DC Volts 1 0 Vde 1 Press and then select the DC On softkey The Offset value pueoies selected 590 OmVoc tcl 2 Enter the desired voltage level as an Offset Enter 1 0 Vde with the numeric keypad or knob E es ft off Offset You can enter any dc voltage from 5 Vde to 5 Vdc 22 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave At power on the duty cycle for square waves is 50 You can ad
247. o re enable the output remove the overload from the Output connector and send the OUTP ON command 181 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands OUTPut LOAD lt ohms gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum OUTPut LOAD MINimum MAXimum Select the desired output termination e the impedance of the load attached to the output of the Agilent 33220A The specified value is used for amplitude offset and high low level settings You can set the load to any value from 10 to 10 kQ MIN selects 19 MAX selects 10 KQ INF sets the output termination to high impedance gt 10 kQ The default is 50Q The LOAD query returns the current load setting in ohms or 9 9E 37 for high impedance e The Agilent 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to the front panel Output connector If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude offset and high low levels will be incorrect Ifyou change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude offset and high low levels are automatically adjusted and no error will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half e Y
248. offset is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the phase offset in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the function generator converts the phase offset to degrees PHASe REFerence Immediately set the zero phase reference point without changing the output of the function generator This command does not change the phase offset as set with the PHAS command it only changes the phase reference This command does not have a query form PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe OFF ON PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe Disable or enable the function generator from generating an error if the phase lock is ever lost The default is OFF If the phase lock is lost and the error is enabled a Reference phase locked loop is unlocked error is generated The unlock error setting is not stored in non volatile memory That is the setting will be lost when the power is cycled The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 249 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The SCPI Status System This section describes the structure of the SCPI status system used by the function generator The status system records various conditions and states of the instrument in several register groups as shown on the following page Each of the register groups is made up of several low level registers called Condition registers Event registers and Enabl
249. ommand to enable the sweep mode ene oft 209 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands Sweep Commands FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STARt MINimum MAXimum Set the start frequency used in conjunction with the stop frequency Select from 1 uHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz MIN 1 uHz MAX 20 MHz The STAR query returns the start frequency in hertz To sweep up in frequency set the start frequency lt stop frequency To sweep down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency FREQuency STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STOP MINimum MAXimum Set the stop frequency used in conjunction with the start frequency Select from 1 uHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 1 kHz MIN 1 Hz MAX 20 MHz The STOP query returns the stop frequency in hertz 210 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands FREQuency CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency CENTer MINimum MAXimum Set the center frequency used in conjunction with the frequency span Select from 1 pHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 550 Hz MIN 1 Hz MAX based on the frequency span and maximum frequency for the selected function as shown below The C
250. on the next page 1 Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and de are not allowed 2 Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the PM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 8 and 4 below 3 Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and dc are not allowed Use the PM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape 4 Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the PM INT FREQ command 5 Set the phase deviation Set the phase deviation to any value from 0 to 360 degrees using the PM DEV command 6 Enable PM modulation After you have set up the other modulation parameters use the PM STAT ON command to enable PM 197 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Modulation PM Commands PM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform PM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PM SOURCe Select the source of the modulating si
251. onization when the Bus source is selected send the WAL wait command When the WAI command is executed the function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands For example the following command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized TRIG SOUR BUS TRG WAI TRG WAL e You can use the OPC operation complete query command or the OPC operation complete command to signal when the sweep or burst is complete The OPC command returns 1 to the output buffer when the sweep or burst is complete The OPC command sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register when the sweep or burst is complete TRIGger Trigger a sweep or burst from the remote interface This command can be used with any of the available trigger sources TRIG SOUR command For example you can use the TRIG command to issue an immediate trigger while waiting for an external trigger TRG Trigger a sweep or burst from the remote interface only if the bus software trigger source is currently selected TRIG SOUR BUS command TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRiGcger SLOPe Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger signal on the rear panel Trig In connector The default is POS rising edge The SLOP query returns POS or NEG
252. or a manual trigger from the front panel key ora software bus trigger By default the internal trigger source is selected If you want to use an external or a software trigger source you must first select that source For example the following command strings sent from your computer will output a 3 cycle burst each time the rear panel Trig In connector receives the rising edge of a TTL pulse BURS NCYC 3 Set burst count to 3 cycles TRIG SLOP POS Set polarity to rising edge TRIG SOUR EXT Select external trigger source BURS STAT ON Enable burst mode 162 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command Using the APPLy Command See also Output Configuration starting on page 55 tn chapter 3 The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator over the remote interface You can select the function frequency amplitude and offset all in one command as shown in the syntax statement below APPLy lt function gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt For example the following command string sent from your computer will output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN 5 KHZ 3 0 VPP 2 5 V The APPLy command performs the following operations Sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to sending the TRIG SOUR IMM command e Turns off any modulation sweep or burst mode currently enabled and places the instrume
253. or 10 volts for a high impedance load Voffset lt Vmax Yep If the specified offset voltage is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum de voltage allowed with the amplitude specified From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the offset will be adjusted as described Limits Due to Output Termination The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting the APPLy command does not change the termination setting For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 chms to high impedance the offset voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 200 mVdc and no error will be generated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed offset will drop in half See the OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited ifthe waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts into 50 ohms The 0 DAC value is still used as the offset reference even if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC 167 Chap
254. or dBm by specifying the units as part of the APPLy command as shown below APPL SIN 5 0E 3 3 0 VRMS 2 5 Or you can use the VOLT UNIT command see page 184 to specify the output units for all commands that follow Unless you specify the units as part of the APPLy command the VOLT UNIT command takes precedence For example if you select Vrms using the VOLT UNIT command and do not include units with the APPLy command the value specified for the amplitude parameter in the APPLy command will be in Vrms 165 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp See the VOLT UNIT command on page 184 for more information Limits Due to Units Selection In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary wavefo
255. ork administrator for the IP address to use All IP addresses take the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where each nnn is a byte value in the range 000 through 255 You can enter a new IP address using the numeric keypad not the knob Just type in the numbers and the period delimiters using the keypad Use the left cursor key as a backspace key 50 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interface b Set the Subnet Mask The subnet mask is required if your network has been divided into subnets Ask your network administrator whether a subnet mask is needed and for the correct mask Press the Subnet Mask softkey and enter the subnet mask in the IP address format using the keypad 255 255 000 000 pep IP Subnet Default B Gn Address Mask S DIRE c Set the Default Gateway The gateway address is the address of a gateway which is a device that connects two networks Ask your network administrator whether a gateway is in use and for the correct address Press the Default Gateway softkey and enter the gateway address in the IP address format using the keypad d Exit the IP Setup menu Press DONE to return to the LAN menu 4 Configure the DNS Setup optional DNS Domain Name Service is an Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses Ask your network administrator whether DNS is in use and if it is for the host name domain name and DNS server addres
256. orm and output With Fgen WriteString DATA COPY PULSE VOLATILE Copy arb to non volatile memory WriteString FUNCtion USER PULSE Select the active arb waveform WriteString FUNCtion SHAPe USER Output the selected arb waveform WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 WriteString FREQuency 5000 VOLTage 5 Output termination is 50 Ohms Output frequency is 5 kHz 5 Vpp WriteString OUTPut ON Enable Output End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 310 pami a s pond i 15 m S Tutorial In order to achieve the best performance from the Agilent 33220A it may be helpful for you to gain a better understanding of the internal operations of the instrument This chapter describes basic signal generation concepts and gives specific details on the internal operations of the function generator e Direct Digital Synthesis on page 313 Creating Arbitrary Waveforms on page 316 Square Waveform Generation on page 318 e Pulse Waveform Generation on page 319 Signal Imperfections on page 320 e Output Amplitude Control on page 322 e Ground Loops on page 323 e Attributes of AC Signals on page 325 Modulation on page 327 Frequency Sweep on page 332 e Burst on page 333 You can use an arbitrary waveform generator in a variety of applications where it might be otherwise difficult or impossible to generate complex ou
257. ot change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front panel operation Press and press the I O softkey Then heck select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary Then select Subnet Mask e There is no SCPI command to set a subnet mask force 5 1 3 7 Chapier 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Default Gateway LAN A gateway is a network device that provides a connection between networks The default gateway setting is the IP address of such a device kd You need not set a gateway address if DHCP is in use Contact your network administrator to find out whether a gateway is being used and for the address Enter the gateway address using the numeric keypad mot the knob The gateway address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front panel operation Press and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary Then select Default Gateway There is no SCPI command to set a gateway address Host Name LAN A host name is the host portion of the domain name which is translated into an IP address Contact your network administrator for the correct host name Enter the host name using the knob and cursor keys Each character in the name can be a letter a through z number or dash
258. ot be set to dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance OUTP LOAD command The function generator has converted the units to Vpp Settings conflict trigger output disabled by trigger external When the external trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time Settings conflict trigger output connector used by FSK If you have enabled FSK and have selected the external source FSK SOUR EXT command the trigger out signal cannot be enabled OUTP TRIG ON command The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time Settings conflict trigger output connector used by burst gate If you have selected the gated burst mode BURS MODE GAT command with burst enabled the trigger out signal cannot be enabled OUTP TRIG ON command The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time 219 221 221 221 221 221 22 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict trigger output connector used by trigger external When the external trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the
259. ou cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp See the VOLT UNIT command on page 184 for more information 182 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Output Configuration Commands OUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted OUTPut POLarity Invert the waveform relative to the offset voltage In the normal mode default the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle In the inverted mode the waveform goes negative during the first part of the cycle The POL query returns NORM or INV As shown in the examples below the waveform is inverted relative to the offset voltage Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged when the waveform is inverted Normal Inverted Normal Inverted onde Offset OV No Offset Voliage With Offset Voltage e When a waveform is inverted the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted OUTPut SYNC OFF ON OUTPut SYNC Disable or enable the front panel Sync connector At lower amplitudes you can reduce output distortion by disabling the Sync signal The default setting is ON The SYNC query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e For more details on the Sync signal for each waveform function see Sync Output Signal on page 68 e When the Sync signal is disabled the output level on the Syne connector is a logic low lev
260. output from the front panel Sync connector goes high at the beginning of each sweep If you have disabled the Marker function the Sync signal goes low at the midpoint of the sweep However if you have enabled the Marker function the Sync signal goes low when the output frequency reaches the specified marker frequency The marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency You can use the Marker function to identify a notable frequency in the response of a device under test DUT for example you may want to identify a resonance To do this connect the Sync output to one channel of your oscilloscope and connect the DUT output to another channel Then trigger the oscilloscope with the rising edge of the Sync signal to position the start frequency on the left side of the screen Adjust the marker frequency until the falling edge of the Sync signal lines up with the interesting feature in the device s response You can then read the frequency from the front panel display of the 33220A Sync Output a aa pe SET E E Sa E E E E A E OES i E i y P Od es eefapr kap ad DUT Output Sweep with Marker at DUT Resonance Burst You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst You can use burst in one of two modes N Cycle Burst also called triggered burst or Gated Burst 333
261. output is enabled 5 View the waveform Press to view the waveform parameters 500 0010 00 Hz jem j eres T 3K Rate To turn off the Graph Mode press again 39 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a PWM Waveform To Output a PWM Waveform You can configure the function generator to output a pulse width modulated PWM waveform The Agilent 33220A provides PWM for pulse carrier waveforms and PWM is the only type of modulation supported for pulse waveforms In PWM the pulse width or duty cycle of the carrier waveform is varied according to the modulating waveform You can specify either a pulse width and width deviation or a pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation the deviation to be controlled by the modulating waveform For this example you will specify a pulse width and pulse width deviation for a 1 kHz pulse waveform with a 100 Hz sine wave modulating waveform 1 Select the carrier waveform parameters Press and then press the Freq Ampl Offset Width and Edge Time softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example select a a 1 kHz pulse waveform with an amplitude of 1 Vpp a zero offset a pulse Boa width of 100 us and an edge time of 50 ns 2 Select PWM Press PWM is the only modulation type for Pulse Notice that a status message PWM by Sine is shown in the upper left corner of the display 3 Set the width deviation Press the Width Dev softkey and set the value to
262. part of the VOLT command as shown below VOLT 3 0 VRMS Or you can use the VOLT UNIT command see page 184 to specify the output units for all commands that follow e You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp See the VOLT UNIT command on page 184 for more information 175 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands Limits Due to Units Selection In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range tes of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited jo to 6 087 Vpp Gnto 50 ohms While changing amp
263. plicated inside the rear cover of this manual and on the Quick Reference Card Note The power on state will be different than that in the table if you have enabled the power down recall mode See Instrument State Storage on page 126 145 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Factory Default Settings Agilent 33220A Factory Default Settings Output Configuration Factory Setting Function Sine wave Frequency 1 KHz Amplitude Offset 100 mVpp 0 000 Vdc Output Units Vpp Output Termination 50 Q Autorange On Modulation Factory Setting Carrier AM FM PM FSK 1 kHz Sine wave Carrier PWM 1 kHz Pulse Mod Waveform AM Mod Waveform FM PM PWM 100 Hz Sine wave 10 Hz Sine wave AM Depth 100 FM Deviation 100 Hz PM Deviation 180 degrees FSK Hop Frequency 100 Hz FSK Rate 10 Hz PWM Width Deviation 10 us Modulation State Off Sweep Factory Setting Start Stop Frequency 100 Hz 1 kHz Sweep Time 1 Second Sweep Mode Linear Sweep State Off Burst Factory Setting Burst Count 1 Cycle Burst Period 10 ms Burst Start Phase 0 degrees Burst State Off System Related Operations Factory Setting e Power Down Recall Disabled Display Mode On Error Queue Errors are Cleared Stored States Stored Arbs Output State Triggering Operations Trigger Source Remote Interface Configuration No Change Off Factory Seiting Internal Immediate Factory Setting 10 GPIB Address DHCP On iP Address 169 254 0
264. plitude To set the amplitude using a high level and low level press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys 59 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration ki Remote Interface Operation VOLTage lt amplitude gt MINimum MAXimum Or you can set the amplitude by specifying a high level and low level using the following commands VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command DC Offset Voltage The default offset is 0 volts for all functions 60 Limits Due to Amplitude The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load Voffset lt Vmax Vpp If the specified offset voltage is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum dc voltage allowed with the amplitude specified Limits Due to Output Termination The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the offset voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 200 mVdc and no error will be gener
265. power is restored However when shipped from the factory the function generator is configured to automatically recall the factory default state at power on 126 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations e You can assign a custom name to each of the storage locations however you cannot name location 0 from the front panel You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote interface but you can only recall a state by name from the front panel From the remote interface you can only recall a stored state using a number 0 through 4 The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed An error will be generated if you specify a name with more than 12 characters The function generator will not prevent you from assigning the same custom name to different storage locations For example you can assign the same name to locations 1 and 2 Ifyou delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the function generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform gt The front panel display state see Display Control on page 132 is saved when
266. pped to The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as shown below The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse width Edge Time lt 0 625 X Pulse Width Data out of range pulse edge time limited by duty cycle value clipped to The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse duty cycle as shown below The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse duty cycle Edge Time lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 Data out of range period value clipped to This generic message indicates that the pulse period has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range frequency value clipped to This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range user frequency value clipped to upper limit This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the arbitrary waveform function APPL USER or FUNC USER command 288 222 222 eea 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range ramp frequency value clipped to upper limit This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the ramp waveform function APPL RAMP or
267. pter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Remote Interface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS Use the following command to specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the Trig In connector TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative See Triggering on page 115 for more information on triggering Trigger Out Signal A trigger out signal is provided on the rear panel Trig Out connector used with burst and sweep only When enabled a TTL compatible pulse waveform with either a rising edge default or falling edge is output from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst When the Internal immediate trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst The frequency of the waveform is equal to the specified burst period When the External trigger source is selected the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the burst When the Manual trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 ps pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each burst Front Panel Operation After enabling bursts press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desir
268. put is out of range The internal analog to digital converter ADC has determined that the signal applied to the rear panel Modulation In connector is out of range Calibration error setup is invalid You have specified an invalid calibration setup number with the CAL SET command Refer to the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information on the calibration procedures Calibration error setup is out of order Certain calibration setups must be performed in a specific sequence in order to be valid Refer to the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information on the calibration procedures 298 770 781 781 782 784 785 Chapter 5 Error Messages Arbitrary Waveform Errors Arbitrary Waveform Errors The following errors indicate failures that may occur during arbitrary waveform operation Refer to Arbitrary Waveform Commands on page 227 for more information Nonvolatile arb waveform memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store arbitrary waveforms has detected a checksum error The arbitrary waveform cannot be retrieved from memory Not enough memory to store new arb waveform use DATA DELETE The four non volatile memory locations already contain arbitrary waveforms To store another waveform you must first delete one of the stored waveforms using the DATA DELete command Not enough memory to store new arb waveform bad sectors Due to a hardware error there are no more memory locatio
269. r is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the function generator responds with No error The error queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the queue The error queue is not cleared by a reset RST command Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 255 characters 113 Undefined header 242 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands IDN Read the function generator s identification string which contains four fields separated by commas The first field is the manufacturer s name the second field is the model number the third field is the serial number and the fourth field is a revision code which contains four numbers separated by dashes e The command returns a string with the following format be sure to dimension a string variable with at least 50 characters Agilent Technologies 33220A lt serial number gt f ff b bb aa p f ff Firmware revision number b bb Boot kernel revision number aa ASIC revision number p Printed circuit board revision number DISPlay OFF oN DISPlay Disable or enable the function generator front panel display When it is disabled the front panel display is blanked however the bulb used to backlight the display re
270. r the key is disabled when in remote 116 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering External Triggering In the external trigger mode the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified edge See also Trigger Input Signal on the following page Front Panel Operation The external trigger mode is like the manual trigger mode except that you apply the trigger to the Trig In connector To select the external source press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey To specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey Remote Interface Operation TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Use the following command to specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Software Bus Triggering The bus trigger mode is available only from the remote interface This mode is similar to the manual trigger mode from the front panel but you trigger the function generator by sending a bus trigger command The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received e To select the bus trigger source send the following co
271. r Value Definition Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Error Queue One or more errors are stored in the Error Queue One or more bits are set in the Questionable Data Register bits must be enabled Data is available in the instrument s output buffer One or more bits are set in the Standard Event Register bits must be enabled One or more bits are set in the Status Byte Register bits must be enabled Not Used Returns 0 NO m lt gt Questionable Data Message Availabie Standard Event Master Summary O Oe WwW Not Used 202 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Status Byte condition register is cleared when You execute the CLS clear status command You read the event register from one of the other register groups only the corresponding bits are cleared in the condition register The Status Byte enable register is cleared when e You execute the SRE 0 command e You turn the power on and have previously configured the function generator to clear the enable register using the PSC 1 command Note that the enable register will not be cleared at power on if you have configured the function generator using the PSC 0 command S 253 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System Using Service Request SRQ and Serial Poll You must configur
272. r function generator Note The CD ROM provided with your instrument contains connectivity software to enable communications over these interfaces Refer to the instructions provided on the CD ROM to install this software on your PC GPIB Interface You need only set the GPIB address for the function generator and connect it to your PC using a GPIB cable USB Interface There is nothing to configure on your function generator Just connect the function generator to the PC with a USB cable LAN Interface By default DHCP is On which may enable network communication over the LAN interface You may need to set several configuration parameters as described in the LAN configuration sections that follow For detailed background information refer to the Agilent Technologies USB LAN GPIB Connectivity Guide which you can download from the Agilent web site at the following URL www agilent com find connectivity 135 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration GPIB Address Each device on the GPIB IEEE 488 interface must have a unique address You can set the function generator s address to any value between 0 and 30 The address is set to 10 when the function generator is shipped from the factory The GPIB address is displayed at power on The address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Your computer
273. r is turned on state 0 is not automatically recalled The AUTO query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON MEMory STATe VALid 0 1 2 3 4 Query the specified storage location to determine if a valid state is currently stored in that location You can use this command before sending the RCL command to determine if a state has been previously stored in this location Returns 0 if no state has been stored or if it has been deleted Returns 1 if a valid state is stored in the specified location MEMory NSTates Query the total number of memory locations available for state storage Always returns 5 memory location 0 is included 241 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands System Related Commands See also System Related Operations starting on page 126 in chapter 3 SYSTem HRRor Read and clear one error from the function generator s error queue A record of up to 20 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in the error queue See chapter 5 for a complete listing of the error messages Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them The function generator beeps once each time an error is generated unless disabled using the SYST BEEP STAT command If more than 20 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent erro
274. r the 33220A you do not have to change the length of the waveform to change its output frequency All you have to do is create a waveform of any length and then adjust the function generator s output frequency However in order to get the best results and minimize voltage quantization errors it is recommended that you use the full range of the waveform DAC When entering waveform points from the function generator s front panel you are not required to enter the points at evenly spaced intervals in time You can always add additional points as needed where the waveform is more complex From the front panel only you can also use linear interpolation to smooth the transition between waveform points These features make it possible to create useful arbitrary waveforms using a relatively smal number of points With the 33220A you can output an arbitrary waveform to an upper frequency limit of 6 MHz However note that the useful upper limit is usually less due to the function generator s bandwidth limitation and aliasing Waveform components above the function generator s 3 dB bandwidth will be attenuated 316 Chapter 7 Tutorial Creating Arbitrary Waveforms For example consider an arbitrary waveform consisting of 10 cycles of a sine waveform When you set the function generator s frequency to 1 MHz the actual output frequency will be 10 MHz and the amplitude will be attenuated by approximately 3 dB As you increase the frequ
275. r the enable register using the PSC 1 command Note that the enable register will not be cleared at power on if you have configured the function generator using the PSC 0 command 259 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Status Reporting Commands An application program is included in chapter 6 which shows the use of the Status System Registers See page 301 for more information Status Byte Register Commands See the table on page 252 for the register bit definitions STB Query the summary condition register in this register group This command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is processed like any other instrument command This command returns the same result as a Serial Poll but the Master Summary bit bit 6 is not cleared by the STB command SRE lt enable value gt SRE Enable bits in the Status Byte to generate a Service Request To enable specific bits you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits in the register The selected bits are summarized in the Master Summary bit bit 6 of the Status Byte Register If any of the selected bits change from 0 to 1 a Service Request signal is generated The SRE query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the SRE command e A CLS clear status does not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the ev
276. r the event registers and error queue using the CLS command Enable the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register by executing the ESE 1 command Send the OPC command and read the result to ensure synchronization Execute your command string to program the desired configuration and then execute the OPC command as the last command When the command sequence is completed the Operation Complete bit bit 0 is set in the Standard Event register Use a Serial Poll to check to see when bit 5 routed from the Standard Event register is set in the Status Byte condition register You could also configure the function generator for an SRQ interrupt by sending SRE 32 Status Byte enable register bit 5 255 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Questionable Data Register The Questionable Data register group provides information about the quality or integrity of the function generator Any or all of these conditions can be reported to the Questionable Data summary bit through the enable register To set the enable register mask you must write a decimal value to the register using the STAT QUES ENABle command Bit Definitions Questionable Data Register Decimal Bit Number Value Definition Voltage Overload Voltage overload on OUTPUT connector The Output has been disabled Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Not Used Not Used Returns 0 Not Used Not
277. ram the function generator over the remote interface For example the following command string sent from your computer will output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN 5 0B 3 3 0 2 5 Using the Low Level Commands Although the APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator the low level commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters For example the following command strings sent from your computer will output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset FUNC SIN Select sine wave function FREQ 5000 Set frequency to 5 kHz VOLT 3 0 Set amplitude to 3 Vpp VOLT OFFS 2 5 Set offset to 2 5 Vde 161 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Simplified Programming Overview Reading a Query Response Only the query commands commands that end with will instruct the function generator to send a response message Queries return internal instrument settings For example the following command string sent from your computer will read the function generator s error queue and retrieve the response from the most recent error dimension statement Dimension string array 255 elements SYST ERR Read error queue enter statement Enter error string response Selecting a Trigger Source When Sweep or Burst is enabled the function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Trig In connect
278. rator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously re trigger the burst From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the burst period will be adjusted as described Burst Count nananana E DY NS Waveform Frequency Burst Period gt BURSt PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt PHASe MINimum MAXimum Set the starting phase for the burst in degrees or radians as specified by the previous UNIT ANGL command Select from 360 degrees to 360 degrees or 2r to 22 radians The default is 0 degrees 0 radians MIN 360 degrees 2x radians MAX 360 degrees 27 The PHAS query returns the starting phase in degrees or radians e For sine square and ramp waveforms 0 degrees is the point at which the waveform crosses zero volts or the de offset value in a positive going direction For arbitrary waveforms 0 degrees is the first waveform point downloaded to memory This command has no effect on pulse or noise waveforms The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops The output will remain at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase 220 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt STATe OFF ON BURSt STATe Disable or enable the burst mode To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable the burst mode af
279. re similar to the start frequency and stop frequency and are included to give you added flexibility To achieve the same results set the center frequency to 2 525 kHz and the frequency span to 4 950 kHz 5 View the waveform Press to view the waveform parameters Stop Frequenc P o k O00 UE or W OR 000 KHZ 800 G00 Hz P et Reet para Si Sep To turn off the Graph Mode press again You can generate a single frequency sweep by pressing the key For more information see To Trigger a Sweep or Burst on page 46 43 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Burst Waveform To Output a Burst Waveform You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst You can output the burst at a rate determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector For this example you will output a three cycle sine wave with a 20 ms burst period You will not change the other parameters from their default settings internal burst source and 0 degree starting phase nS eS REND SS Ce ee Sete EN Pe ee ee BASA ETET Ce ar Ce ae ey A en A er ae Le ae CC es ee ee es ee ee ee ies spoke eim es i AA S PO EERE EAER AA AAAA LOES or T Select the function and amplitude for the burst For burst waveforms you can select sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveforms noise is allowed only in the gated b
280. rig in connector For more information see Burst Mode on page 106 Chapter 2 Front Pane Menu Operation To Trigger a Sweep or Burst To Trigger a Sweep or Burst You can issue triggers from the front panel for sweeps and bursts using a manual trigger or an internal trigger Internal or automatic triggering is enabled with the default settings of the function generator In this mede the function generator outputs continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected Manual triggering initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time 46 you press the key from the front panel Continue pressing this key to re trigger the function generator The key is disabled when in remote the remote icon turns on while in remote and when a function other than sweep or burst is currently selected or when the output is disabled The key flashes off momentarily when using a manual trigger Ae ow Re iy Vee eweee Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Store the Instrument State To Store the Instrument State You can store the instrument state in one of four non volatile storage locations A fifth storage location automatically holds the power down configuration of the instrument When power is restored the instrument can automatically return to its state before power down 1 Select the desired storage location Press and then select the Store State softkey STATE_1 D fa diale State State SIOP
281. rigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse A sweep consists of a finite number of small frequency steps Since each step takes the same amount of time longer sweep times result in smaller steps and therefore better resolution The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time you select PORE PARANA CIA RRR RR A AA syne Output etd tet toidate i A sperite Beas teete ptet edett et s 3 i f s s i A H 4 s is A 4 ft en Eh EERE 0 EE ay Seer T S RH SETE es EI EER 2 EG E t Hi iit y gt i g f eC EEE ce EE GH GE E g A A 4 4 3 i 2 i T a i R i i 3 TOES EEn TE pe fh 4f t Frequency Sweep Main Output For triggered sweeps the trigger source can be an external signal the key or a command received from the remote interface The input for external trigger signals is the rear panel Trig In connector This connector accepts TTL compatible levels and is referenced to chassis ground not floating ground When not used as an input the Trig In 332 Chapter 7 Tutorial Burst connector can be configured as an output to enable the 33220A to trigger other instruments at the same time as its internal trigger occurs Syne and Marker Signals The
282. rms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited to 6 087 Vpp Gnto 50 ohms While changing amplitude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators The amplitude is controlled however so the output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching ranges To prevent this disruption in the output you can disable the voltage autoranging feature using the VOLT RANG AUTO command see page 179 for more information The APPLy command automatically enables autoranging 166 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command DC Offset Voltage For the offset parameter of the APPLy command you can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEFault in place of a specific value for the parameter MIN selects the most negative dc offset voltage for the function and amplitude specified MAX selects the largest de offset for the function and amplitude specified The default offset is O volts for all functions Limits Due to Amplitude The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load
283. rror Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 305 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Linear Sweep This program found in the Examples chapter6 LinearSweep subdirectory on the CD ROM creates a linear sweep for a sine wave It sets the start and stop frequencies and the sweep time Private Sub cmdLinearSweep Click Dim io_ mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fagen New VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set Fgen IO io_mgr Open txtIO Text On Error GoTo MyError This program sets up a linear sweep using a sinusoid waveform It sets the start and stop frequency and sweep time With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers WriteString FUNCtion SINusoid Select waveshape WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Set the load impedance to 50 Ohms defauit WriteString VOLTage 1 Set the amplitude to 1 Vpp WriteString SWEep SPACing LiNear Set Linear or LOG spacing WriteString SWHep TIME 1 Sweep time is 1 second WriteString FREQuency STARt 1006 Start frequency is 100 Hz WriteString FREQuency STOP 2063 Stop frequency is 20 kHz Frequency sweep limits may also be set as FREQuency CENTer and FREQuency SPAN on the 33250A For the 33250A also see MARKer FREQuency WriteString OUTPut ON
284. s Frequency Modulation FM Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for FM 84 Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The frequency deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency Modulation In 5 V Front Panel Operation After enabling EM press the Source softkey Remote Interface Operation FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Phase Modulation PM A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform PM is very similar to FM but in PM the phase of the modulated waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform For more information on the fundamentals of Phase Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select PM Modulation e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PM and AM at the same time When you enable PM the previous modu
285. s GPIB interface card has its own address Be sure to avoid using the computer s address for any instrument on the interface bus e Front Panel Operation Press and then select the GPIB Address softkey from the I O menu e There is no SCPI command to set the GPIB address DHCP On Off LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a protocol for automatically assigning a dynamic IP address to a device on a network DHCP is typically the easiest way to configure your Agilent 33220A for remote communication using the LAN interface DHCP is On by default Select DHCP On to use DHCP to automatically assign an IP address e Select DHCP Off if you want to manually assign an IP address using the IP Address softkey Ifthe DHCP server fails to assign a valid IP address the currently configured IP Address setting will be used The DHCP setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front panel operation Press and press the FVO softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Press the DHCP On Off softkey to toggle its state There is no SCPI command to set DHCP On Off Note If you change any LAN settings you must cycle the power to activate the new settings This is true for all LAN settings including turning DHCP on or off 136 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote interface Configuration IP Address
286. s a valid combination If you change to a function that is not allowed with modulation sweep or burst then the modulation or mode is turned off Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise DC Arb AM FM PM FSK Carrier wmr Sweeptose gt Burst Mode a e 1 Allowed in the External Gated burst mode only 55 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Function Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum frequency is less than that of the current function the frequency is adjusted to the maximum value for the new function For example if you are currently outputting a 20 MHz sine wave and then change to the ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the output frequency to 200 kHz the upper limit for ramps Amplitude Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum amplitude is less than that of the current function the amplitude is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new function This may occur when the output units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine in Vrms Front Panel Operation To select a function press any key in the top row of function k
287. s to use Start at the LAN menu IF DHS Current Setur Setup Config GONE Press the DNS Setup softkey to display the Host Name field Domain DH r Hame Server DEINE 54 a Set the Host Name Enter the host name The host name is the host portion of the domain name which is translated into an IP address The host name is entered as a string using the knob and cursor keys to select and change characters The host name may include letters numbers and dashes You can use the keypad for the numeric characters only Press to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position b Set the Domain Name Press the Domain Name softkey and enter the domain name The domain name is translated into an IP address The domain name is entered as a string using the knob and cursor keys to select and change characters The domain name may include letters numbers dashes and periods You can use the keypad for the numeric characters only Press to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position c Set the DNS Server address Press the DNS Server softkey and enter the address of the DNS server in the IP address format using the keypad d Exit the DNS Setup menu Press DONE to return to the LAN menu 5 View the current LAN configuration Press the Current Config softkey to view the current LAN configuration To scroll through the configuration u
288. se the T and J softkeys or rotate the knob Press DONE to return to the LAN menu 6 Exit the menu Press DONE to exit each menu in turn or press to exit the Utility menu directly 52 Features and Functions Features and Functions This chapter makes it easy to look up all the details about a particular feature of the function generator It covers both front panel and remote interface operation You may want to read chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation first See chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference for a detailed discussion of the syntax of the SCPI commands to program the function generator This chapter is divided into the following sections Output Configuration on page 55 Pulse Waveforms on page 70 Amplitude Modulation AM on page 74 Frequency Modulation FM on page 79 e Phase Modulation PM on page 84 e Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation on page 89 Pulse Width Modulation PWM on page 89 Frequency Sweep on page 99 Burst Mode on page 106 Triggering on page 115 Arbitrary Waveforms on page 120 System Related Operations on page 126 Remote Interface Configuration on page 135 e Calibration Overview on page 141 Factory Default Settings on page 139 Throughout this manual default states and values are identified These are the power on default states provided you have not enabled the power down recall mode see Instrument Sta
289. select a specific parameter note the softkey labels at the bottom of the display For example to select period press the Period softkey e Asin the normal display mode you can edit numbers using either the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Parameters which normally toggle when you press a key a second time also toggle in the Graph Mode However you can see only one label for each softkey at one time for example Freq or Period To exit the Graph Mode press again The key also serves as a key to restore front panel control after remote interface operations 25 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform There are five built in arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory The following steps show you how to output the built in exponential fall waveform from the front panel For information on creating a custom arbitrary waveform refer to To Create and Store an Arbitrary Waveform on page 120 1 Select the arbitrary waveform function When you press the key to select the arbitrary waveform function a temporary message is displayed indicating which waveform is currently selected the default is exponential rise 2 Select the active waveform Press the Select Wform softkey and then press the Built In softkey to select from the five built in waveforms Then press the Exp Fall softkey The waveform is output usi
290. selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load If the existing amplitude is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the offset voltage specified Vpp lt 2X Vmax Voffset Settings conflict low level changed due to high level You can set the levels to a positive or negative value but note that the high level must always be greater than the low level If you specify a high level that is less than the existing low level the function generator will automatically set the low level to be 1 mV less than the high level 286 221 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict high level changed due to low level You can set the levels to a positive or negative value but note that the high level must always be greater than the low level If you specify a low level that is greater than the existing high level the function generator will automatically set the high level to be 1 mV greater than the low level Data out of range value clipped to upper limit The specified parameter is outside of the function generator s capability The function generator has adjusted the parameter to the maximum value allowed Example PHAS 1000 Data out of range value clipped to lower limit The specified parameter is outside of the function generator s capability The function ge
291. sents binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent as two bytes DATA DAC VOLATILE command State has not been stored The storage location that you specified in the RCL command was not used in a previous SAV command You cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty 300 Application Programs Application Programs This chapter contains several remote interface example programs to help you develop programs for your own application Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference starting on page 147 lists the syntax for the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands available to program the function generator Introduction Six example programs are included in this chapter to demonstrate controlling the Agilent 33220A using SCPI commands All of these programs are written in Microsoft Visual BASIC 6 0 and use the Agilent VISA COM objects The BASIC programs in this chapter and other example programs illustrating the use of several drivers and environments are included on the Agilent IntuiLink for the 33220A Waveform Generator CD ROM shipped with the function generator For a detailed description of these programs refer to the readme file in the Examples directory The programs in this chapter are found in the Examples chapter6 subdirectory If you want to modify the example programs or write your own programs and compile them you will need
292. signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform For a noise waveform the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false Burst Mode Burst Count Burst Period Burst Phase Trigger Source BURS MODE BURS NCYC BURS INT PER BURS PHAS TRIG SOUR Triggered Burst Mode l l l Internal Trigger TRiGgered Available Available Available IMMediate Triggered Burst Mode External Trigger TRIGgered Available Not Used Available EXTernal BUS Gated Burst Mode External Trigger GATed Not Used Not Used Avaliable Not Used 107 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode When the gated mode is selected the burst count burst period and trigger source are ignored these parameters are used for the triggered burst mode only Ifa manual trigger is received it is ignored and no error will be generated When the gated mode is selected you can also select the polarity of the signal on the rear panel Trig In connector Front Panel Operation After enabling bursts press the N Cycle triggered or Gated softkey To select the polarity of the external gate signal on the Trig In connector press the Polarity softkey The default polarity is POS true high logic Remote Interface Operation BURSt MODE TRIGgered GATed Use the following command to select
293. softkey to set the time for the current point this softkey is not available for Point 1 Press the Voltage softkey to set the voitage level for the current point For this example set the time to 2 ms and the voltage level to 3 0 V 2 G0 as BETTE 000ms sf Insert Remove Erei Point Tine iYotage Point Point Store 10 Define the remaining waveform points Using the Time and Voltage softkeys define the remaining waveform points using the values shown in the table below e The time value of the last point that can be defined in the waveform must be less than the specified cycle period gt The waveform editor automatically connects the last waveform point to the voltage level of first point to create a continuous waveform To insert additional points after the current waveform point press the Insert Point softkey The new point is inserted midway between the current point and the next defined point e To remove the current waveform point press the Remove Point softkey The remaining points are joined using the interpolation method currently selected You cannot remove Point 1 since the waveform must have a defined initial value 123 H Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Store the arbitrary waveform in memory Press the End Store softkey to store the new waveform in memory Then press the DONE softkey to store the waveform in volatile memory or press the Store in Non Vol soft
294. ss LAN LSE Id ROME Select the LAN menu Press the LAN softkey Current antic DONE From this menu you can select IP Setup to set an IP address and related parameters DNS Setup to configure DNS or Current Config to view the 7 current LAN configuration AQ Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interface Establish an IP Setup To use the Agilent 33220A on the network you must first establish an IP setup including an IP address and possibly a subnet mask and gateway address Press the IP Setup softkey By default DHCP is set to On DONE With DHCP On an IP address will automatically be set by DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol when you connect the Agilent 33220A to the network provided the DHCP server is found and is able to do so DHCP also automatically deals with the subnet mask and gateway address if required This is typically the easiest way to establish LAN communication for your instrument All you need to do is leave DHCP On However if you cannot establish communication by means of DHCP you will need to manually set an IP address and a subnet mask and gateway address if they are in use Follow these steps a Set the IP Address Press the softkey to select DHCP Off The manual selection softkeys appear and the current IP address is displayed 469 254 002 020 HEP IP Subnet Default f Wi On lacddress Mask Gateway BONE Contact your netw
295. ss and then select the topic entitled View the remote command error queue topic number 2 Then press the SELECT softkey to view the errors in the error queue As shown below the first error in the list i e the error at the top of the list is the first error that was generated Renate Interface Command Errors 143 Undefined header 4151 Invatid string data DOME Remote Interface Operation SYSTem ERRor Reads one error from the error queue Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 255 characters 113 Undefined header 129 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Beeper Control Normally the function generator will emit a tone when an error is generated from the front panel or over the remote interface You may want to disable the front panel beeper for certain applications The beeper state is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory the beeper is enabled Turning off the beeper does not disable the key click generated when you press a front panel key or turn the knob Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Beep softkey from the System menu e Remote Interface Operation SYSTem BEEPer Issue a single beep immediately SYSTem BEEPer STATe OFF ON Disable enable beeper Display Bulb Saver The front panel display
296. t Used Not Used Available Not Used Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands Configure the burst waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform You can select a sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveform noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and dc is not allowed For internally triggered bursts the minimum frequency is 2 mHz For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count Select the triggered or gated burst mode Select the triggered burst mode called N Cycle on the front panel or external gated burst mode using the BURS MODE command Set the burst count Set the burst count the number of cycles per burst to any value between 1 and 50 000 cycles or infinite using the BURS NCYC command Used in the triggered burst mode only Set the burst period Set the burst period the interval at which internally triggered bursts are generated to any value from 1 us to 500 seconds using the BURS INT PER command Used ony in the triggered burst mode with an internal trigger source Set the burst starting phase Set the starting phase of the burst to any value from 360 degrees to 360 degrees using the BURS PHAS command Select the trigger source Select the trigger source using the TRIG SOUR comman
297. t frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer The Sync enable setting is overridden by enabling the marker used with the sweep mode see page 68 Therefore when the marker is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the Sync setting is ignored e Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps press the Marker softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired marker frequency e Remote Interface Operation MARKer FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum MARKer Off 0n 103 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Sweep Trigger Source In the sweep mode the function generator outputs a single sweep when a trigger signal is received After one sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency the function generator waits for the next trigger while outputting the start frequency Sweep trigger source Internal External or Manual The default is Internal When the Internal immediate source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sw
298. te Storage on page 126 Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming Square brackets indicate optional keywords or parameters Braces enclose parameters within a command string e Triangle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must substitute a value e A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Configuration This section contains information to help you configure the function generator for outputting waveforms You may never have to change some of the parameters discussed here but they are provided to give you the flexibility you might need Output Function The function generator can output five standard waveforms sine square ramp pulse and noise plus de You can also select one of five built in arbitrary waveforms or create your own custom waveforms You can internally modulate sine square ramp and arbitrary waveforms using AM FM PM or FSK You can also modulate pulse using PWM Linear or logarithmic frequency sweeping is available for sine square ramp and arbitrary waveforms You can generate a burst waveform using any of the standard or arbitrary waveforms but not de The default function is sine wave e The table below shows which output functions are allowed with modulation sweep and burst Each e indicate
299. ter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy Command Syntax Because of the use of optional parameters in the APPLy commands enclosed in square brackets you must specify frequency to use the amplitude parameter and you must specify both frequency and amplitude to use the offset parameter For example the following command string is valid frequency and amplitude are specified but offset is omitted and therefore uses a default value APPL SIN 5 06 3 3 0 However you cannot specify an amplitude or offset without specifying a frequency You can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEFault in place of specific values for the frequency amplitude and offset parameters For example the following statement outputs a 3 Vpp sine wave at 20 MHz the maximum frequency for sine with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN MAX 3 0 2 5 The APPLy command performs the following operations Sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to sending the TRIG SOUR IMM command Turns off any modulation sweep or burst mode currently enabled and places the instrument in the continuous waveform mode Turns on the Output connector OUTP ON command but does not change the output termination setting OUTP LOAD command e Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging VOLT RANG AUTO command For square waveforms overrides the current duty cycle setting and automat
300. ter you have set up the other burst parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON gt The function generator will not allow the burst mode to be enabled at the same time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable burst the sweep or modulation mode is turned off UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe Select degrees or radians to set the starting phase for the burst with the BURS PHAS command remote interface only The default is DEG The ANGL query returns DEG or RAD e From the front panel the starting phase is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the starting phase in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the function generator converts the phase to degrees TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRiIGger SOURCe Select the trigger source for the triggered burst mode only In the triggered burst mode the function generator outputs a waveform with the specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger The default is IMM The SOUR query returns IMM EXT or BUS When the Immediate internal source is selected the frequency at which the burst is generated is determined by the burst pertod BURS INT
301. terface Note You can use the phase lock commands described below to synchronize multiple 33220A instruments only if all of these instruments have Option 001 External Timebase Reference installed This option provides the 10 MHz Out and 10 MHz In back panel connectors and the circuitry required to synchronize the instruments PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum PHASe MINimum MAXimum Adjust the phase offset of the output waveform in degrees or radians as specified by the previous UNIT ANGL command not available for pulse and noise Select from 360 degrees to 360 degrees or 27 to 27 radians The default is 0 degrees 0 radians MIN 360 degrees 27 radians MAX 360 degrees 27 radians The PHAS query returns the phase offset in degrees or radians 248 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only The specified phase adjustment causes a bump or hop in the output waveform in order to change the phase relationship to the external signal to which it is currently locked e This phase adjustment for phase lock applications is independent of the burst phase as set by the BURS PHAS command see page 220 UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe Select degrees or radians to set the phase offset value using the PHAS command remote interface only The default is DEG The ANGL query returns DEG or RAD e From the front panel the phase
302. terface errors are always displayed even if the display is disabled The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled after an instrument reset RST command or when you return to local front panel operation Press the key or execute the IEEE 488 GTL Go To Local command from the remote interface to return to the local state The display state is saved when you store the instrument state using SAV command When you recall the instrument state using RCL command the front panel display will return to the previous state e You can display a text message on the front panel by sending a command from the remote interface You can use upper or lower case letters A Z numbers 0 9 and any other character on a standard computer keyboard Depending on the number of characters that you specify the function generator will choose one of two font sizes to display the message You can display approximately 12 characters in a large font and approximately 40 characters in a small font 132 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Remote Interface Operation The following command turns off the front panel display DISP OFF The following command displays a message on the front panel and turns on the display if currently disabled DISP TEXT Test in Progress To clear the message displayed on the front panel without changing the display state send the following command DISP TEXT
303. ters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 159 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Calibration Commands see page 264 for more information CALibration CALibration l SECure STATe OFF ON lt code gt SECure STATe SECure CODE lt new code gt SETup lt 0 1 2 3 94 gt SETUP VALue lt value gt VALUE COUNt STRing lt quoted string gt STRing IEEE 488 2 Common Commands CLS ESR ESE lt enable value gt ESE TDN LRN FOPC OPC PSc 0j1 PSC RST SAV 0 1 2 3 4 State 0 is the instrument state at power down RCL 0 1 2 3 4 States 1 through 4 are user defined states STRB SRE lt enable value gt SRE TRG one 160 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Simplified Programming Overview Simplified Programming Overview This section gives an overview of the basic techniques used to program the function generator over the remote interface This section is only an overview and does not give all of the details you will need to write your own application programs Refer to the remainder of this chapter and also the application examples in chapter 6 for more details You may also want to refer to the reference manual that came with your programming application for further details on instrument control Using the APPLy Command The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to prog
304. the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the level will be adjusted as described e You can set the levels to a positive or negative value but note that the high level must always be greater than the low level If you specify a low level that is greater than the high level the function generator will automatically set the high level to be 1 mV more than the new low level A Settings conflict error will be generated 178 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Output Configuration Commands Note that when you set the high and low levels you are also setting the amplitude of the waveform For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV e Limits Due to Output Termination If you change the output termination setting the displayed voltage levels will be automatically adjusted and no error will be generated For example if you set the high level to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 200 mVdc If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed voitage will drop in half See the OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information To invert the waveform relative to the offset voltage you can use the OUTP POL command See page 183 for more
305. the PWM DEV DCYC command are automatically converted to the equivalent width deviation in seconds PWM STATe OFF ON PWM STATe Disable or enable PWM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PWM and AM at the same time When you enable PWM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PWM the sweep or burst mode is turned off e PWM is allowed only when pulse is the selected function 207 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands Frequency Sweep Commands See also Frequency Sweep starting on page 99 in chapter 3 Sweep Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a sweep The commands used for sweep are listed on page 210 Select the waveform shape amplitude and offset Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform pulse noise and de are not allowed 3 Select the frequency boundaries of the sweep You can set the frequen
306. the ending quote is missing 276 Chapter 5 Error Messages Command Errors 158 String data not allowed A character string was received but is not allowed for this command Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid parameter type Example BURS NCYC TEN 161 Invalid block data Applies only to the DATA DAC VOLATILE command For a definite length block the number of bytes of data sent does not match the number of bytes that you specified in the block header For an indefinite length block an EOI End or Identify was received without an accompanying lt new line gt character 168 Block data not allowed Data was sent to the function generator in arbitrary block format but this command does not accept this format Check to see if you have sent the correct data type with the command Example BURS NCYC 10 170 to 178 Expression errors The function generator does not accept mathematical expressions 277 211 223 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Execution Errors Trigger ignored A Group Execute Trigger GET or TRG was received but the trigger was ignored Make sure that you have selected the proper trigger source and verify that the sweep or burst mode is enabled Too much data An arbitrary waveform was specified that contains more than 65 536 waveform points Verify the number of points in the DATA VOLATILE or DATA DAC VOLATILE command
307. the front panel also changes the security code as seen from the remote interface e Remote Interface Operation To change the security code you must first unsecure the function generator using the old security code Then enter the new code as shown below CAL SECURE STATE OFF AT33220A Unsecure with old code CAL SECURE CODE SN123456789 Enter new code Calibration Count You can query the function generator to determine how many calibrations have been performed Note that your function generator was calibrated before it left the factory When you receive your function generator be sure to read the count to determine its initial value The calibration count is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset The calibration count increments up to a maximum of 65 535 after which it rolls over to 0 Since the value increments by one for each calibration point a complete calibration may increase the value by many counts Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Cal Info softkey from the Test Cal menu The calibration count is listed as one of the messages on the display Remote Interface Operation CALibration COUNt ste de 4 3 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview Calibration Message The function generator allows you to store one message in calibration memory in the mainframe For example you can store su
308. the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 upper limit for this frequency Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz Settings conflict marker forced into sweep span The marker must be within the sweep span between the start and stop frequency The marker frequency is forced into that range 285 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict selected arb is missing changing selection to default If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the function generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform Settings conflict offset changed due to amplitude The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load If the existing offset voltage is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum de voltage allowed with the amplitude specified Voffset lt Vmax YEE Settings conflict amplitude changed due to offset The relationship between output amplitude and offset voltage is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the
309. the sweep The frequency of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time e When the External trigger source is selected the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep When the Manual trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 ys pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst e Front Panel Operation After enabling sweeps press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey e Remote Interface Operation OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger OFF oN 105 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Mode You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst The function generator can produce a burst using sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveforms noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and de is not allowed For more information on the fundamentals of the burst mode refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select Burst e The function generator will not allow burst to be enabled at the same time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable burst the sweep or modulation mode is turned off e Front Panel Oper
310. tically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 198 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Phase Modulation PM Commands PM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum PM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM SOUR INT command Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in hertz PM DEViation lt deviation in degrees gt MINimum MAXimum PM DEViation MINimum MAXimum Set the phase deviation in degrees This value represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform Select any value from 0 to 360 degrees The default is 180 degrees MIN 0 degrees MAX 360 degrees The DEV query returns the phase deviation in degrees If you select the External modulating source PM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the frequency deviation to 180 degrees then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce a negative phase shift PM STATe OFF oNn PM STATe Disable or enable PM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can e
311. tion modulating frequency and modulation shape e Specify PM phase deviation modulating frequency and modulation shape Specify FSK hop frequency and FSK rate Specify PWM deviation modulating frequency and modulation shape Configure the parameters for frequency sweep Select linear or logarithmic sweeping Select the start stop frequencies or center span frequencies Select the time in seconds required to compiete a sweep e Specify a marker frequency Specify an internal or external trigger source for the sweep Specify the slope rising or falling edge for an external trigger source Specify the slope rising or falling edge of the Trig Out signal Configure the parameters for burst Select the triggered N Cycle or externally gated burst mode Select the number of cycles per burst 1 to 50 000 or Infinite Select the starting phase angle of the burst 360 to 360 Specify the time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst Specify an internal or external trigger source for the burst Specify the slope rising or falling edge for an extemal trigger source Specify the slope rising or falling edge of the Trig Out signal e 33 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation Front Pane Menu Reference storey Store and recall instrument states e Store up to four instrument states in non volatile memory e Assign a custom name to ea
312. to install the Agilent E2094 I O Libraries software e If you are using GPIB The Agilent E2094 I O Libraries software is provided with Agilent GPIB I O products The software should have been loaded when you installed your GPIB interface card in your PC Ifyou are using USB or LAN If you don t have a copy you can order the Agilent 2094 I O Libraries software on CD ROM You must have version M order Agilent product number E2094M or a later version to support USB and LAN You can obtain the Agilent i O Libraries through the Agilent Developer Network Go to www agilent com find buyadn and purchase an ADN Professional Membership This gives you the right to download the latest version of the Agilent I O Libraries Look for the Agilent I O Libraries link under Downloads on the ADN web site Microsoft and Visual BASIC are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation et aaa O 302 Chapter 6 Application Programs Introduction Once you have installed the appropriate software components see Remote Interface Configuration in chapter 3 for information on configuring your interface The programs listed in this chapter are protected by copyright Copyright 2003 Agilent Technologies Inc You have a royalty free right to use modify reproduce and distribute the Sample Application Files and or any modified version in any way you find useful provided that you agree that Agilent has no
313. tput Frequency on page 17 To Set the Output Amplitude on page 18 To Set a DC Offset Voltage on page 20 To Set the High Level and Low Level Values on page 21 To Select DC Volts on page 22 To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave on page 23 e To Configure a Pulse Waveform on page 24 To View a Waveform Graph on page 25 To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform on page 26 e To Use the Built In Help System on page 27 e To Rack Mount the Function Generator on page 29 14 Power Switch 1 2 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Prepare the Function Generator for Use To Prepare the Function Generator for Use Check the list of supplied items Verify that you have received the following items with your instrument If anything is missing please contact your nearest Agilent Sales Office Q One power cord This User s Guide One Service Guide One folded Quick Start Tutorial One folded Quick Reference Guide Certificate of Calibration Connectivity software on CD ROM L DOU EE Connect the power cord and turn on the function generator The instrument runs a short power on self test which takes a few seconds When the instrument is ready for use it displays a message about how to obtain help along with the current GPIB address The function generator powers up in the sine wave function at 1 kHz with an amplitude of 100 mV peak to peak into a 50Q termination At power on the Output connector
314. tput waveforms With an arbitrary waveform generator signal imperfections such as rise time ringing glitches noise and random timing variations can be easily simulated in a controlled manner Physics chemistry biomedicine electronics mechanics and other fields can benefit from the versatility of an arbitrary waveform generator Wherever things vibrate pump pulse bubble burst or change with time in any way there are possible applications limited only by your ability to specify the waveform data 312 Chapter 7 Tutorial Direct Digital Synthesis Direct Digital Synthesis The Agilent 33220A uses a signal generation technique called Direct Digital Synthesis DDS for all waveform functions except pulse As shown below a stream of digital data representing the desired waveform is sequentially read from waveform memory and is applied to the input of a digital to analog converter DAC The DAC is clocked at the function generator s sampling frequency of 50 MHz and outputs a series of voltage steps approximating the desired waveform A low pass anti aliasing filter then smooths the voltage steps to create the final waveform Waveform Memory Anti Aliasing 50 MHz Filter Waveform DAC Direct Digital Synthesis Circuitry The 33220A uses two anti aliasing filters An elliptical filter is used for continuous sine waves because of its nearly flat passband and sharp cutoff above 20 MHz Since elliptical filters exh
315. uare ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and dc are not allowed Use the AM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the AM INT FREQ command Set the modulation depth Set the modulation depth also called percent modulation to any value from 0 to 120 using the AM DEPT command Enable AM modulation After you have set up the other modulation parameters use the AM STAT ON command to enable AM 190 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Amplitude Modulation AM Commands AM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform AM SOURce INTernal ExXTernal AM SOURce Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 using the AM DEPT command then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum ampl
316. uency whichever is lower MAX the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is higher The FREQ query returns the marker frequency in hertz e When sweep is enabled the marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the marker frequency will be adjusted as described MARKer OFF ON MARKer Disable or enable the frequency marker When the frequency marker is disabled the signal output from the Syne connector is the normal Sync signal for the carrier waveform see Sync Output Signal on page 68 The default is OFF The MARK query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The oUTP SYNC command is overridden by the setting of the MARK command Therefore when the marker frequency is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the OUTP SYNC command is ignored 215 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands Burst Mode Commands See also Burst Mode starting on page 106 in chapter 3 Burst Mode Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a burst You can use burst in one of two modes as described below The function generator enabl
317. ulse Period The range for the pulse period is 200 ns to 2000 s The default is 1 ms e Front Panel Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period e Remote Interface Operation PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 94 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PWM Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle L Ramp has 100 symmetry we Triangle has 50 symmetry a e Negative ramp has 0 symmetry Ps e Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation Front Panel Operation After enabling PWM press the Shape softkey Remote Interface Operation PWM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PWM e Modulating frequency internal source 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz Front Panel Operation After enabling PWM press the PWM Freq softkey Re
318. ulse width expressed in time units like the period or a duty cycle expressed as a percentage of the period The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source For more information on the fundamentals of Pulse Width Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select PWM Modulation e The function generator only allows PWM to be selected for a pulse waveform and PWM is the only modulation type supported for pulse The function generator will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled Front Panel Operation You must enable PWM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press to select pulse and then press to turn on modulation PWM is selected as the only modulation type supported for pulse The PWM waveform is output using the present settings for the pulse frequency modulating frequency output amplitude offset voltage pulse width and edge time Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters PWM STATe OFF ON 93 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Pulse Waveform e Pulse is the only waveform shape supported for PWM Front Panel Operation Press Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion PULSe You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command P
319. ult is NORM The BORD query returns NORM or SWAP In NORM byte order default the most significant byte MSB of each data point is assumed first In SWAP byte order the least significant byte LSB of each data point is assumed first Most computers use the swapped byte order e The function generator represents binary data as signed 16 bit integers which are sent as two bytes Therefore each waveform data point requires 16 bits which must be transferred as two bytes on the function generator s interfaces DATA COPY lt destination arb name gt VOLATILE Copy the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory The source for the copy is always volatile You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy to volatile e The arb name may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed If you specify a name with more than 12 characters a Program mnemonic too long error is generated The VOLATILE parameter is optional and can be omitted Note that the keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form The following built in waveform names are reserved and cannot be used with the DATA COPY command EXP_RISE EXP FALL NEG_ RAMP SINC and CARDIAC If you specify one of the
320. uring 264 security code 141 setups 264 storing text message 265 unsecuring 264 calibration certificate 15 CALibration command 264 cardiac waveform 228 carriage return 269 carrying handle changing positions 16 carrying handle removing 29 catalog arbitrary waveforms 235 CD ROM connectivity software 15 CD ROM shipped with 33220A 302 center frequency sweep 211 chassis ground 6 comma separator 133 command errors 129 242 command parameter types 270 command reference 147 command summary 149 command terminators 269 command trigger 225 commands PM 198 PWM 204 configuration LAN 135 remote interface 135 USB 135 connector 248 Modulation In 78 84 92 98 Index tS Output 181 Sync Output 68 Syne output 215 Trig In 118 Trig Out 119 connector 10 MHz Out 248 context sensitive help 27 contrast display 131 count burst 219 count burst 110 crest factor 325 crest factor arb waveforms 237 custom name stored states 240 custom names arbitrary waveforms 124 stored states 127 cycle count burst 219 cycle count burst 110 D DATA ATTRibute CFACtor command Zat CATalog command 235 COPY command 232 DAC VOLATILE command 230 DELete ALL command 236 DELete command 236 NVOLatile CATalog command 235 FREE command 235 DATA VOLATILE command 229 dBe 320 et dBm 62 184 326 de offset amplitude limitations 60 167 177 arb waveform limitations 167 arbitrary waveform limitations 61 177
321. urst mode and de is not allowed For this example select a sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select the burst mode Press and then verify that the N Cycle internally triggered mode is currently selected Notice that a status message N Cycle Burst is shown in the upper left corner of the display 44 Beene Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Burst Waveform 3 Set the burst count Press the Cycles softkey and then set the count to 3 using the numeric or knob Start Burst ase Period 4 Set the burst period Press the Burst Period softkey and then set the period to 20 ms using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys The burst period sets the time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst note the display icon N cycle Burst Int Trigger 20 000ms eu N Cycle Cycle ae Ty Burat Tri igger hated Infinite Phase Perind SEL At this point the function generator outputs a continuous three cycle burst if the output is enabled 5 View the waveform Press to view the waveform parameters To turn off the Graph Mode press again You can generate a single burst with the specified count by pressing the key For more information see To Trigger a Sweep or Burst on page 46 You can also use an external gate signal to either turn the burst signal on or off based on the external signal applied to the rear panel T
322. ut is an important part of operating the function generator Instrument State Storage The function generator has five storage locations in non volatile memory to store instrument states The locations are numbered 0 through 4 The function generator automatically uses location 0 to hold the state of the instrument at power down You can also assign a user defined name to each of the locations 1 through 4 for use from the front panel e You can store the instrument state in any of the five storage locations However you can only recall a state from a location that contains a previously stored state e From the remote interface only you can use storage location 0 to store a fifth instrument state you cannot store to this location from the front panel However note that location 0 is automatically overwritten when power is cycled the instrument state previously stored will be overwritten e The state storage feature remembers the selected function including arbitrary waveforms frequency amplitude de offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use When shipped from the factory storage locations 1 through 4 are empty location 0 contains the power down state When power is turned off the function generator automatically stores its state in storage location 0 You can configure the function generator to automatically recall the power down state when
323. ut termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half e You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp e Front Panel Operation Press and select the Output Setup softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to select the desired load impedance or press the Load softkey again to choose High Z Remote Interface Operation OUTPut LOAD lt ohms gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum 63 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Duty Cycle Square Waves The duty cycle of a square wave represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level assuming that the waveform is not inverted 7 20 Duty Cycle 80 Duty Cycle See Pulse Waveforms on page 70 for information about duty cycle for pulse waveforms e Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz e The duty cycle is stored in volatile memory the duty cycle is set to 50 the default when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square wave to another function When you return to t
324. veform e Front Panel Operation Press any of the front panel function keys except or For arbitrary waveforms press and then choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 80 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default ts 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency 20 MHz 20 MHz 200 kHz 6 MHz e The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the frequency deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 6 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to set the deviation to a value that is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency i Front Panel Operation To set the carrier frequency press
325. volatile storage location You cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty When shipped from the factory storage locations 1 through 4 are empty location 0 has the power on state e From the remote interface only you can use location 0 to store a fifth instrument state you cannot store to this location from the front panel However keep in mind that location 0 is automatically overwritten when power is cycled the instrument state previously stored will be overwritten 239 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands MEMory STATe NAME 0 1 2 3 4 lt name gt MEMory STATe NAME 0 1 2 3 4 Assign a custom name to the specified storage location You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote interface but you can only recall a state by name from the front panel the RCL command requires a numeric parameter The NAME query returns a quoted string containing the name currently assigned to the specified storage location If you have not assigned a user defined name to the specified location the default name is returned CAUTO_RECALL STATE_1 STATE_2 STATE 8 or STATE_ 4 e The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed An error is
326. xternal gated burst 107 external gated mode burst 216 external reference 248 external source AM 78 FSK 92 PWM 98 external trigger 117 213 221 224 external trigger source 118 119 F filters anti aliasing 313 firmware revision 134 floating point download arbs 2 FM 79 carrier frequency 81 carrier waveform 80 deviation 329 DEViation command 96 97 195 frequency deviation 83 96 97 195 INTernal FREQuency command 195 FUNCtion command 194 modulating frequency 82 195 modulating source 84 194 modulating waveform 82 194 overview 193 344 STATe command 196 tutorial description 327 FORMat BORDer command 232 FREQuency CENTer command 211 SPAN command 211 STARt command 210 STOP command 210 frequency burst limitation 57 duty cycle limitations 57 174 front panel selection 17 function limitations 57 164 174 sweep time 102 FREQuency command 174 frequency deviation FM 83 96 97 195 329 frequency modulation carrier frequency 81 carrier waveform 80 deviation 329 frequency deviation 83 96 97 195 modulating frequency 82 195 modulating source 84 194 modulating waveform 89 modulation waveshape 194 overview 193 tutorial description 327 frequency span sweep 211 frequency sweep 99 332 center frequency 101 211 external trigger source 118 frequency span 101 211 linear vs logarithmic 102 332 linear vs logarithmic Spacing 212 marker frequency 103 215 overview 208 Spacing 102 st
327. y foo 000 01 an 100 Ot pp A i Signal 0 000 Ype on Ground In Graph Mode only one parameter label is displayed for each key at one time Front Panel Number Entry You can enter numbers from the front panel using one of two methods Use the knob and cursor keys to modify the displayed number 1 Use the keys below the knob to move the cursor left or right 2 Rotate the knob to change a digit clockwise to increase Use the keypad to enter numbers and the softkeys to select units 1 Key in a value as you would on a typical calculator 2 Select a unit to enter the value HHz CARCEL The Rear Panel at a Glance 1 External 10 MHz Reference Input Terminal 5 USB Interface Connector Option 001 only 6 LAN Interface Connector 2 Internal 10 MHz Reference Output Terminal 7 GPIB Interface Connector Option 001 only 8 Chassis Ground 3 External Modulation Input Terminal 4 Input External Trig FSK Burst Gate Output Trigger Output Use the menu to pg e Select the GPIB address see chapter 2 Set the network parameters for the LAN interface see chapter 2 S Display the current network parameters see chapter 2 Ea ae Note The External and Internal 10 MHz Reference Terminals 1 and 2 above are present only if Option 001 External Timebase Reference is installed Otherwise the holes for these connectors are plugged WARNING For protection from electrical shock the power cord ground must not
328. ycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform For a noise waveform the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false When the gated mode is selected the burst count burst period and trigger source are ignored these parameters are used for the triggered burst mode only If a manual trigger is received TRIG command it is ignored and no error will be generated 218 Chapter 4 Remote interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt NCYCles lt cycles gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum BURSt NCYCles MINimum MAXimum Set the number of cycles to be output per burst triggered burst mode only Select from 1 cycle to 50 000 cycles in 1 cycle increments see the restrictions below The default is 1 cycle MIN 1 cycle MAX based on the burst period and frequency as shown below Select INF to generate a continuous burst waveform The NCYC query returns the burst count from 1 to 50 000 or 9 9E 37 for an infinite count gt Ifthe Immediate trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the burst count must be less than the product of the maximum burst period and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Maximum Burst Period X Waveform Frequency e The function generator will automatically increase the burst period up to its maximum value to accommodate the specified burst cou
329. you store the instrument state When you recall the state the front panel display will return to the previous state e An instrument reset does not affect the configurations stored in memory Once a state is stored it remains until it is overwritten or specifically deleted 127 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations e Front Panel Operation Press and then select the Store State or Recall State softkey To delete a stored state select the Delete State softkey also removes the custom name for this memory location To configure the function generator to recall the factory default state at power on press and then select the Pwr On Default softkey To configure the function generator to recall the power down state when power is restored press and select the Pwr On Last softkey You can assign a custom name to each of the four storage locations The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character _ To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob To delete all characters to the right of the cursor press the key Remote Interface Operation SAV 0 1 2 3 4 State Ois the instrument state at power down RCL 0 112 3 4 States 1 2 3 and 4 are user defined states To assign a custom na
330. ys the current selection is highlighted 190 0mV RY Period HiLeveld LobLeye Enter the magnitude of the desired amplitude Using the numeric keypad enter the value 50 dam CARCEL Select the desired units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the function generator outputs the waveform with the displayed amplitude if the output is enabled For this example press MVpys Note You can also enter the desired value using the knob and cursor keys 18 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Output Amplitude You can easily convert the displayed amplitude from one unit to another For example the following steps show you how to convert the amplitude from Vrms to Vpp 4 Enter the numeric entry mode Press the key to enter the numeric entry mode elon T mes eee Ae Pi Br CANCEL 5 Select the new units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units The displayed value is converted to the new units For this example press the Vpp softkey to convert 50 mVrms to its equivalent in volts peak to peak AMW y Anp NOt feet Period Hi evel LoLlevel To change the displayed amplitude by decades press the right cursor key to move the cursor to the units on the right side of the display Then rotate the knob to increase or decrease the displayed amplitude by decades a Feriad HiLews Lolevel a n Frea Ea 19

Agilent Technologies 33220A User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents